US20070126664A1 - Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device - Google Patents
Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20070126664A1 US20070126664A1 US11/562,678 US56267806A US2007126664A1 US 20070126664 A1 US20070126664 A1 US 20070126664A1 US 56267806 A US56267806 A US 56267806A US 2007126664 A1 US2007126664 A1 US 2007126664A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- transistor
- potential
- electrode
- switch
- semiconductor device
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Granted
Links
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 title claims description 275
- 239000003990 capacitor Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 130
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 claims description 189
- 229910021417 amorphous silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 35
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 claims description 22
- 239000010409 thin film Substances 0.000 claims description 14
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 236
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 89
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 50
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 40
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 36
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 31
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 25
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 22
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 22
- 239000011229 interlayer Substances 0.000 description 20
- 239000012212 insulator Substances 0.000 description 19
- 230000006866 deterioration Effects 0.000 description 17
- 239000002585 base Substances 0.000 description 16
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 16
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 16
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 15
- 230000005525 hole transport Effects 0.000 description 15
- 239000012535 impurity Substances 0.000 description 15
- PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nickel Chemical compound [Ni] PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 14
- 239000000565 sealant Substances 0.000 description 11
- 238000007789 sealing Methods 0.000 description 11
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 238000002425 crystallisation Methods 0.000 description 10
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 10
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 10
- 229910021420 polycrystalline silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 10
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 10
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 10
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon dioxide Inorganic materials O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 9
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 8
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 8
- 229910052814 silicon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- 239000010949 copper Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 7
- UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Benzene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1 UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Palladium Chemical compound [Pd] KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 229910052581 Si3N4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 239000011651 chromium Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229910052759 nickel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N platinum Chemical compound [Pt] BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 6
- HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon nitride Chemical compound N12[Si]34N5[Si]62N3[Si]51N64 HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 238000004544 sputter deposition Methods 0.000 description 6
- 239000010936 titanium Substances 0.000 description 6
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 206010047571 Visual impairment Diseases 0.000 description 5
- NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N acrylic acid group Chemical group C(C=C)(=O)O NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 229910045601 alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000000956 alloy Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000002041 carbon nanotube Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229910021393 carbon nanotube Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000005229 chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 5
- 229910010272 inorganic material Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000011147 inorganic material Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000011368 organic material Substances 0.000 description 5
- -1 polyethylene terephthalate Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000005236 sound signal Effects 0.000 description 5
- 229910052715 tantalum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tungsten Chemical compound [W] WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000010937 tungsten Substances 0.000 description 5
- RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper Chemical compound [Cu] RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- ZOKXTWBITQBERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Molybdenum Chemical compound [Mo] ZOKXTWBITQBERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910009372 YVO4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc Chemical compound [Zn] HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- XJHCXCQVJFPJIK-UHFFFAOYSA-M caesium fluoride Chemical compound [F-].[Cs+] XJHCXCQVJFPJIK-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 4
- 230000003197 catalytic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229910052804 chromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 229910052802 copper Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 229910052839 forsterite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical group [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- AMWRITDGCCNYAT-UHFFFAOYSA-L hydroxy(oxo)manganese;manganese Chemical compound [Mn].O[Mn]=O.O[Mn]=O AMWRITDGCCNYAT-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 4
- 239000011777 magnesium Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910052750 molybdenum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000011733 molybdenum Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920005591 polysilicon Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 230000001681 protective effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 125000000391 vinyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])=C([H])[H] 0.000 description 4
- 239000011701 zinc Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910052725 zinc Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- SPDPTFAJSFKAMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-n-[4-[4-(n-[4-(3-methyl-n-(3-methylphenyl)anilino)phenyl]anilino)phenyl]phenyl]-4-n,4-n-bis(3-methylphenyl)-1-n-phenylbenzene-1,4-diamine Chemical group CC1=CC=CC(N(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N(C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)=C1 SPDPTFAJSFKAMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorus Chemical compound [P] OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000004642 Polyimide Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000007983 Tris buffer Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910052783 alkali metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 150000001340 alkali metals Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 229910052784 alkaline earth metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 150000001342 alkaline earth metals Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000000919 ceramic Substances 0.000 description 3
- 150000004696 coordination complex Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 230000008025 crystallization Effects 0.000 description 3
- ZUOUZKKEUPVFJK-UHFFFAOYSA-N diphenyl Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 ZUOUZKKEUPVFJK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- KPUWHANPEXNPJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N disiloxane Chemical class [SiH3]O[SiH3] KPUWHANPEXNPJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000000295 emission spectrum Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000005499 laser crystallization Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 238000011017 operating method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229910052698 phosphorus Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000011574 phosphorus Substances 0.000 description 3
- IEQIEDJGQAUEQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N phthalocyanine Chemical compound N1C(N=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C(N=C3C4=CC=CC=C4C(=N4)N3)=N2)=C(C=CC=C2)C2=C1N=C1C2=CC=CC=C2C4=N1 IEQIEDJGQAUEQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229920001721 polyimide Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229910052709 silver Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N tantalum atom Chemical compound [Ta] GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- IYZMXHQDXZKNCY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-n,1-n-diphenyl-4-n,4-n-bis[4-(n-phenylanilino)phenyl]benzene-1,4-diamine Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1N(C=1C=CC(=CC=1)N(C=1C=CC(=CC=1)N(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC(=CC=1)N(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 IYZMXHQDXZKNCY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FQJQNLKWTRGIEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-5-[3-[5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl]phenyl]-1,3,4-oxadiazole Chemical compound C1=CC(C(C)(C)C)=CC=C1C1=NN=C(C=2C=C(C=CC=2)C=2OC(=NN=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C(C)(C)C)O1 FQJQNLKWTRGIEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ZVFQEOPUXVPSLB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-4-phenyl-5-(4-phenylphenyl)-1,2,4-triazole Chemical compound C1=CC(C(C)(C)C)=CC=C1C(N1C=2C=CC=CC=2)=NN=C1C1=CC=C(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=C1 ZVFQEOPUXVPSLB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- DHDHJYNTEFLIHY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=NC2=C1C=CC1=C(C=3C=CC=CC=3)C=CN=C21 DHDHJYNTEFLIHY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VFUDMQLBKNMONU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-[4-(4-carbazol-9-ylphenyl)phenyl]carbazole Chemical group C12=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2N1C1=CC=C(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=C1 VFUDMQLBKNMONU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Argon Chemical compound [Ar] XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Boron Chemical compound [B] ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chromium Chemical compound [Cr] VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000004593 Epoxy Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052691 Erbium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Iron Chemical compound [Fe] XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WHXSMMKQMYFTQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lithium Chemical compound [Li] WHXSMMKQMYFTQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Magnesium Chemical compound [Mg] FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052779 Neodymium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229920001609 Poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229910000577 Silicon-germanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052775 Thulium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium Chemical compound [Ti] RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052769 Ytterbium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- LEVVHYCKPQWKOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Si].[Ge] Chemical compound [Si].[Ge] LEVVHYCKPQWKOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000010405 anode material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052785 arsenic Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- RQNWIZPPADIBDY-UHFFFAOYSA-N arsenic atom Chemical compound [As] RQNWIZPPADIBDY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 2
- 235000010290 biphenyl Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000004305 biphenyl Substances 0.000 description 2
- UFVXQDWNSAGPHN-UHFFFAOYSA-K bis[(2-methylquinolin-8-yl)oxy]-(4-phenylphenoxy)alumane Chemical compound [Al+3].C1=CC=C([O-])C2=NC(C)=CC=C21.C1=CC=C([O-])C2=NC(C)=CC=C21.C1=CC([O-])=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 UFVXQDWNSAGPHN-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 2
- 229910052796 boron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011575 calcium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000002019 doping agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000001704 evaporation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000011152 fibreglass Substances 0.000 description 2
- RBTKNAXYKSUFRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N heliogen blue Chemical compound [Cu].[N-]1C2=C(C=CC=C3)C3=C1N=C([N-]1)C3=CC=CC=C3C1=NC([N-]1)=C(C=CC=C3)C3=C1N=C([N-]1)C3=CC=CC=C3C1=N2 RBTKNAXYKSUFRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000004770 highest occupied molecular orbital Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910052744 lithium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000004768 lowest unoccupied molecular orbital Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910052749 magnesium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- HCWCAKKEBCNQJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N magnesium orthosilicate Chemical compound [Mg+2].[Mg+2].[O-][Si]([O-])([O-])[O-] HCWCAKKEBCNQJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000007769 metal material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229910000476 molybdenum oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000004767 nitrides Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- YRZZLAGRKZIJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxyvanadium phthalocyanine Chemical compound [V+2]=O.C12=CC=CC=C2C(N=C2[N-]C(C3=CC=CC=C32)=N2)=NC1=NC([C]1C=CC=CC1=1)=NC=1N=C1[C]3C=CC=CC3=C2[N-]1 YRZZLAGRKZIJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052763 palladium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000000059 patterning Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920002120 photoresistant polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229910052697 platinum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229920002620 polyvinyl fluoride Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000010453 quartz Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000010791 quenching Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000171 quenching effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004151 rapid thermal annealing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000010948 rhodium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910001925 ruthenium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- WOCIAKWEIIZHES-UHFFFAOYSA-N ruthenium(iv) oxide Chemical compound O=[Ru]=O WOCIAKWEIIZHES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000001424 substituent group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 229910019655 synthetic inorganic crystalline material Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- TVIVIEFSHFOWTE-UHFFFAOYSA-K tri(quinolin-8-yloxy)alumane Chemical compound [Al+3].C1=CN=C2C([O-])=CC=CC2=C1.C1=CN=C2C([O-])=CC=CC2=C1.C1=CN=C2C([O-])=CC=CC2=C1 TVIVIEFSHFOWTE-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 2
- 229910001935 vanadium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- NAWXUBYGYWOOIX-SFHVURJKSA-N (2s)-2-[[4-[2-(2,4-diaminoquinazolin-6-yl)ethyl]benzoyl]amino]-4-methylidenepentanedioic acid Chemical compound C1=CC2=NC(N)=NC(N)=C2C=C1CCC1=CC=C(C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(=C)C(O)=O)C(O)=O)C=C1 NAWXUBYGYWOOIX-SFHVURJKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DTZWGKCFKSJGPK-VOTSOKGWSA-N (e)-2-(2-methyl-6-(2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyl-1,2,3,5,6,7-hexahydropyrido[3,2,1-ij]quinolin-9-yl)vinyl)-4h-pyran-4-ylidene)malononitrile Chemical compound O1C(C)=CC(=C(C#N)C#N)C=C1\C=C\C1=CC(C(CCN2CCC3(C)C)(C)C)=C2C3=C1 DTZWGKCFKSJGPK-VOTSOKGWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OXMLYOWNIHJUJX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-tert-butyl-9,10-dinaphthalen-2-ylanthracene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC(C=3C4=CC=CC=C4C(C=4C=C5C=CC=CC5=CC=4)=C4C=CC=C(C=34)C(C)(C)C)=CC=C21 OXMLYOWNIHJUJX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- STTGYIUESPWXOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline Chemical compound C=12C=CC3=C(C=4C=CC=CC=4)C=C(C)N=C3C2=NC(C)=CC=1C1=CC=CC=C1 STTGYIUESPWXOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XANIFASCQKHXRC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(1,3-benzothiazol-2-yl)phenol zinc Chemical compound [Zn].Oc1ccccc1-c1nc2ccccc2s1.Oc1ccccc1-c1nc2ccccc2s1 XANIFASCQKHXRC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UOCMXZLNHQBBOS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(1,3-benzoxazol-2-yl)phenol zinc Chemical compound [Zn].Oc1ccccc1-c1nc2ccccc2o1.Oc1ccccc1-c1nc2ccccc2o1 UOCMXZLNHQBBOS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OBAJPWYDYFEBTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-tert-butyl-9,10-dinaphthalen-2-ylanthracene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC(C3=C4C=CC=CC4=C(C=4C=C5C=CC=CC5=CC=4)C4=CC=C(C=C43)C(C)(C)C)=CC=C21 OBAJPWYDYFEBTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PZLZJGZGJHZQAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-4-(4-ethylphenyl)-5-(4-phenylphenyl)-1,2,4-triazole Chemical compound C1=CC(CC)=CC=C1N1C(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C(C)(C)C)=NN=C1C1=CC=C(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=C1 PZLZJGZGJHZQAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OGGKVJMNFFSDEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methyl-n-[4-[4-(n-(3-methylphenyl)anilino)phenyl]phenyl]-n-phenylaniline Chemical group CC1=CC=CC(N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)=C1 OGGKVJMNFFSDEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HXWWMGJBPGRWRS-CMDGGOBGSA-N 4- -2-tert-butyl-6- -4h-pyran Chemical compound O1C(C(C)(C)C)=CC(=C(C#N)C#N)C=C1\C=C\C1=CC(C(CCN2CCC3(C)C)(C)C)=C2C3=C1 HXWWMGJBPGRWRS-CMDGGOBGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AWXGSYPUMWKTBR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-carbazol-9-yl-n,n-bis(4-carbazol-9-ylphenyl)aniline Chemical compound C12=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2N1C1=CC=C(N(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=C1 AWXGSYPUMWKTBR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YYBDMVYJCYKTAM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-methyl-2-[1-(5-methyl-1,3-benzoxazol-2-yl)-4-(2-phenylethenyl)cyclohexa-2,4-dien-1-yl]-1,3-benzoxazole Chemical compound N=1C2=CC(C)=CC=C2OC=1C(C=C1)(C=2OC3=CC=C(C)C=C3N=2)CC=C1C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 YYBDMVYJCYKTAM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UOOBIWAELCOCHK-BQYQJAHWSA-N 870075-87-9 Chemical compound O1C(C(C)C)=CC(=C(C#N)C#N)C=C1\C=C\C1=CC(C(CCN2CCC3(C)C)(C)C)=C2C3=C1 UOOBIWAELCOCHK-BQYQJAHWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VIZUPBYFLORCRA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9,10-dinaphthalen-2-ylanthracene Chemical compound C12=CC=CC=C2C(C2=CC3=CC=CC=C3C=C2)=C(C=CC=C2)C2=C1C1=CC=C(C=CC=C2)C2=C1 VIZUPBYFLORCRA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FCNCGHJSNVOIKE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9,10-diphenylanthracene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C(C1=CC=CC=C11)=C(C=CC=C2)C2=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 FCNCGHJSNVOIKE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SXGIRTCIFPJUEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-anthracen-9-ylanthracene Chemical group C1=CC=CC2=CC3=CC=CC=C3C(C=3C4=CC=CC=C4C=C4C=CC=CC4=3)=C21 SXGIRTCIFPJUEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004925 Acrylic resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000178 Acrylic resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002799 BoPET Polymers 0.000 description 1
- MSDMPJCOOXURQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N C545T Chemical compound C1=CC=C2SC(C3=CC=4C=C5C6=C(C=4OC3=O)C(C)(C)CCN6CCC5(C)C)=NC2=C1 MSDMPJCOOXURQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Calcium Chemical compound [Ca] OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101000837344 Homo sapiens T-cell leukemia translocation-altered gene protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000005041 Mylar™ Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910017502 Nd:YVO4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- ZCQWOFVYLHDMMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Oxazole Chemical compound C1=COC=N1 ZCQWOFVYLHDMMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004952 Polyamide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004695 Polyether sulfone Substances 0.000 description 1
- BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silver Chemical compound [Ag] BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100028692 T-cell leukemia translocation-altered gene protein Human genes 0.000 description 1
- FZWLAAWBMGSTSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Thiazole Chemical compound C1=CSC=N1 FZWLAAWBMGSTSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ATJFFYVFTNAWJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tin Chemical compound [Sn] ATJFFYVFTNAWJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc monoxide Chemical compound [Zn]=O XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XHCLAFWTIXFWPH-UHFFFAOYSA-N [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[V+5].[V+5] Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[V+5].[V+5] XHCLAFWTIXFWPH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000001408 amides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001454 anthracenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052786 argon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000004982 aromatic amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000004945 aromatic hydrocarbons Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052788 barium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- DSAJWYNOEDNPEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N barium atom Chemical compound [Ba] DSAJWYNOEDNPEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WZJYKHNJTSNBHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzo[h]quinoline Chemical group C1=CN=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C=CC2=C1 WZJYKHNJTSNBHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052790 beryllium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- ATBAMAFKBVZNFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N beryllium atom Chemical compound [Be] ATBAMAFKBVZNFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GQVWHWAWLPCBHB-UHFFFAOYSA-L beryllium;benzo[h]quinolin-10-olate Chemical compound [Be+2].C1=CC=NC2=C3C([O-])=CC=CC3=CC=C21.C1=CC=NC2=C3C([O-])=CC=CC3=CC=C21 GQVWHWAWLPCBHB-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- XZCJVWCMJYNSQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N butyl pbd Chemical compound C1=CC(C(C)(C)C)=CC=C1C1=NN=C(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C=2C=CC=CC=2)O1 XZCJVWCMJYNSQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052793 cadmium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- BDOSMKKIYDKNTQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N cadmium atom Chemical compound [Cd] BDOSMKKIYDKNTQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052792 caesium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- TVFDJXOCXUVLDH-UHFFFAOYSA-N caesium atom Chemical compound [Cs] TVFDJXOCXUVLDH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052791 calcium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- WUKWITHWXAAZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-L calcium difluoride Chemical compound [F-].[F-].[Ca+2] WUKWITHWXAAZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 150000001716 carbazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000010406 cathode material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910017052 cobalt Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010941 cobalt Substances 0.000 description 1
- GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N cobalt atom Chemical compound [Co] GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000002860 competitive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 1
- VBVAVBCYMYWNOU-UHFFFAOYSA-N coumarin 6 Chemical compound C1=CC=C2SC(C3=CC4=CC=C(C=C4OC3=O)N(CC)CC)=NC2=C1 VBVAVBCYMYWNOU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 1
- BKMIWBZIQAAZBD-UHFFFAOYSA-N diindenoperylene Chemical compound C12=C3C4=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2C1=CC=C3C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=C4C1=C32 BKMIWBZIQAAZBD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005401 electroluminescence Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000605 extraction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002349 favourable effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000001153 fluoro group Chemical group F* 0.000 description 1
- 229910052733 gallium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000007789 gas Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052732 germanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- GNPVGFCGXDBREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N germanium atom Chemical compound [Ge] GNPVGFCGXDBREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005247 gettering Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005283 ground state Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910003437 indium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium(iii) oxide Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[In+3].[In+3] PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium;oxotin Chemical compound [In].[Sn]=O AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000011261 inert gas Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052741 iridium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N iridium atom Chemical compound [Ir] GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003446 ligand Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007791 liquid phase Substances 0.000 description 1
- PQXKHYXIUOZZFA-UHFFFAOYSA-M lithium fluoride Chemical compound [Li+].[F-] PQXKHYXIUOZZFA-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 238000004020 luminiscence type Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000013081 microcrystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 1
- QGLKJKCYBOYXKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N nonaoxidotritungsten Chemical compound O=[W]1(=O)O[W](=O)(=O)O[W](=O)(=O)O1 QGLKJKCYBOYXKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000000962 organic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- PQQKPALAQIIWST-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxomolybdenum Chemical compound [Mo]=O PQQKPALAQIIWST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000001997 phenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(*)C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 1
- 229920000172 poly(styrenesulfonic acid) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002647 polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001230 polyarylate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000515 polycarbonate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004417 polycarbonate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000728 polyester Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006393 polyether sulfone Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000139 polyethylene terephthalate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000005020 polyethylene terephthalate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002924 primary amino group Chemical group [H]N([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 125000002943 quinolinyl group Chemical group N1=C(C=CC2=CC=CC=C12)* 0.000 description 1
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052703 rhodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- MHOVAHRLVXNVSD-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodium atom Chemical compound [Rh] MHOVAHRLVXNVSD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000010979 ruby Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910001750 ruby Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- VSZWPYCFIRKVQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N selanylidenegallium;selenium Chemical compound [Se].[Se]=[Ga].[Se]=[Ga] VSZWPYCFIRKVQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910021332 silicide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- FVBUAEGBCNSCDD-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicide(4-) Chemical compound [Si-4] FVBUAEGBCNSCDD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000003377 silicon compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000004332 silver Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007790 solid phase Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004528 spin coating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052712 strontium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- CIOAGBVUUVVLOB-UHFFFAOYSA-N strontium atom Chemical compound [Sr] CIOAGBVUUVVLOB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MZLGASXMSKOWSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N tantalum nitride Chemical compound [Ta]#N MZLGASXMSKOWSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JBQYATWDVHIOAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N tellanylidenegermanium Chemical compound [Te]=[Ge] JBQYATWDVHIOAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000002834 transmittance Methods 0.000 description 1
- ODHXBMXNKOYIBV-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphenylamine Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1N(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 ODHXBMXNKOYIBV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001930 tungsten oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- YVTHLONGBIQYBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N zinc indium(3+) oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O--].[Zn++].[In+3] YVTHLONGBIQYBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/10—OLED displays
- H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
- H10K59/131—Interconnections, e.g. wiring lines or terminals
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/22—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources
- G09G3/30—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels
- G09G3/32—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED]
- G09G3/3208—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] organic, e.g. using organic light-emitting diodes [OLED]
- G09G3/3225—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] organic, e.g. using organic light-emitting diodes [OLED] using an active matrix
- G09G3/3233—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] organic, e.g. using organic light-emitting diodes [OLED] using an active matrix with pixel circuitry controlling the current through the light-emitting element
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/22—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources
- G09G3/30—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/22—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources
- G09G3/30—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels
- G09G3/32—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L27/00—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate
- H01L27/02—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers
- H01L27/12—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers the substrate being other than a semiconductor body, e.g. an insulating body
- H01L27/1214—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers the substrate being other than a semiconductor body, e.g. an insulating body comprising a plurality of TFTs formed on a non-semiconducting substrate, e.g. driving circuits for AMLCDs
- H01L27/1255—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers the substrate being other than a semiconductor body, e.g. an insulating body comprising a plurality of TFTs formed on a non-semiconducting substrate, e.g. driving circuits for AMLCDs integrated with passive devices, e.g. auxiliary capacitors
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L27/00—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate
- H01L27/15—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components having potential barriers, specially adapted for light emission
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L29/00—Semiconductor devices specially adapted for rectifying, amplifying, oscillating or switching and having potential barriers; Capacitors or resistors having potential barriers, e.g. a PN-junction depletion layer or carrier concentration layer; Details of semiconductor bodies or of electrodes thereof ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor
- H01L29/66—Types of semiconductor device ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor
- H01L29/68—Types of semiconductor device ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor controllable by only the electric current supplied, or only the electric potential applied, to an electrode which does not carry the current to be rectified, amplified or switched
- H01L29/76—Unipolar devices, e.g. field effect transistors
- H01L29/772—Field effect transistors
- H01L29/78—Field effect transistors with field effect produced by an insulated gate
- H01L29/786—Thin film transistors, i.e. transistors with a channel being at least partly a thin film
- H01L29/78651—Silicon transistors
- H01L29/7866—Non-monocrystalline silicon transistors
- H01L29/78663—Amorphous silicon transistors
- H01L29/78669—Amorphous silicon transistors with inverted-type structure, e.g. with bottom gate
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L29/00—Semiconductor devices specially adapted for rectifying, amplifying, oscillating or switching and having potential barriers; Capacitors or resistors having potential barriers, e.g. a PN-junction depletion layer or carrier concentration layer; Details of semiconductor bodies or of electrodes thereof ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor
- H01L29/66—Types of semiconductor device ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor
- H01L29/68—Types of semiconductor device ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor controllable by only the electric current supplied, or only the electric potential applied, to an electrode which does not carry the current to be rectified, amplified or switched
- H01L29/76—Unipolar devices, e.g. field effect transistors
- H01L29/772—Field effect transistors
- H01L29/78—Field effect transistors with field effect produced by an insulated gate
- H01L29/786—Thin film transistors, i.e. transistors with a channel being at least partly a thin film
- H01L29/78651—Silicon transistors
- H01L29/7866—Non-monocrystalline silicon transistors
- H01L29/78672—Polycrystalline or microcrystalline silicon transistor
- H01L29/78678—Polycrystalline or microcrystalline silicon transistor with inverted-type structure, e.g. with bottom gate
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B33/00—Electroluminescent light sources
- H05B33/12—Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
- G09G2300/08—Active matrix structure, i.e. with use of active elements, inclusive of non-linear two terminal elements, in the pixels together with light emitting or modulating elements
- G09G2300/0809—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels
- G09G2300/0819—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels used for counteracting undesired variations, e.g. feedback or autozeroing
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
- G09G2300/08—Active matrix structure, i.e. with use of active elements, inclusive of non-linear two terminal elements, in the pixels together with light emitting or modulating elements
- G09G2300/0809—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels
- G09G2300/0842—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels forming a memory circuit, e.g. a dynamic memory with one capacitor
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
- G09G2300/08—Active matrix structure, i.e. with use of active elements, inclusive of non-linear two terminal elements, in the pixels together with light emitting or modulating elements
- G09G2300/0809—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels
- G09G2300/0842—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels forming a memory circuit, e.g. a dynamic memory with one capacitor
- G09G2300/0861—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels forming a memory circuit, e.g. a dynamic memory with one capacitor with additional control of the display period without amending the charge stored in a pixel memory, e.g. by means of additional select electrodes
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
- G09G2300/08—Active matrix structure, i.e. with use of active elements, inclusive of non-linear two terminal elements, in the pixels together with light emitting or modulating elements
- G09G2300/0809—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels
- G09G2300/0842—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels forming a memory circuit, e.g. a dynamic memory with one capacitor
- G09G2300/0861—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels forming a memory circuit, e.g. a dynamic memory with one capacitor with additional control of the display period without amending the charge stored in a pixel memory, e.g. by means of additional select electrodes
- G09G2300/0866—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels forming a memory circuit, e.g. a dynamic memory with one capacitor with additional control of the display period without amending the charge stored in a pixel memory, e.g. by means of additional select electrodes by means of changes in the pixel supply voltage
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2310/00—Command of the display device
- G09G2310/02—Addressing, scanning or driving the display screen or processing steps related thereto
- G09G2310/0243—Details of the generation of driving signals
- G09G2310/0251—Precharge or discharge of pixel before applying new pixel voltage
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2310/00—Command of the display device
- G09G2310/02—Addressing, scanning or driving the display screen or processing steps related thereto
- G09G2310/0243—Details of the generation of driving signals
- G09G2310/0254—Control of polarity reversal in general, other than for liquid crystal displays
- G09G2310/0256—Control of polarity reversal in general, other than for liquid crystal displays with the purpose of reversing the voltage across a light emitting or modulating element within a pixel
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
- G09G2320/02—Improving the quality of display appearance
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
- G09G2320/02—Improving the quality of display appearance
- G09G2320/0219—Reducing feedthrough effects in active matrix panels, i.e. voltage changes on the scan electrode influencing the pixel voltage due to capacitive coupling
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
- G09G2320/02—Improving the quality of display appearance
- G09G2320/0233—Improving the luminance or brightness uniformity across the screen
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
- G09G2320/02—Improving the quality of display appearance
- G09G2320/0261—Improving the quality of display appearance in the context of movement of objects on the screen or movement of the observer relative to the screen
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
- G09G2320/04—Maintaining the quality of display appearance
- G09G2320/043—Preventing or counteracting the effects of ageing
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/2007—Display of intermediate tones
- G09G3/2018—Display of intermediate tones by time modulation using two or more time intervals
- G09G3/2022—Display of intermediate tones by time modulation using two or more time intervals using sub-frames
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/10—OLED displays
- H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a semiconductor device functioning to control a current supplied to a load by a transistor, and a display device including a pixel formed using a current-drive display element of which luminance changes in accordance with a signal, and a signal line driver circuit and a scan line driver circuit which drive the pixel.
- the present invention also relates to a driving method thereof. Further, the present invention relates to an electronic device having the display device in a display portion.
- a self-luminous display device using a light emitting element such as an electroluminescent (EL) element in a pixel a so-called light emitting device has attracted attention.
- a light emitting element used for such a self-luminous display device an organic light emitting diode (OLED) and an EL element have attracted attention, and have been used for an EL display or the like. Since these light emitting elements emit light by themselves, they have advantages such as higher pixel visibility, no backlight required, and higher response speed, over a liquid crystal display. Note that the luminance of many of light emitting elements is controlled by the value of current flowing to the light emitting element.
- each pixel is provided with a transistor that controls light emission of a light emitting element.
- the active matrix display device is expected to be put into practical use because not only can it achieve high-definition and large-screen display that is difficult for a passive matrix display device, but also it operates with less power consumption than a passive matrix display device.
- FIG. 46 A structure of a pixel of a conventional active matrix display device is shown in FIG. 46 (Reference 1: Japanese Published Patent Application No. H8-234683).
- the pixel shown in FIG. 46 includes thin film transistors (TFTs) 11 and 12 , a capacitor 13 , and a light emitting element 14 , and is connected to a signal line 15 and a scan line 16 .
- TFTs thin film transistors
- a source electrode or a drain electrode of the TFT 12 and one electrode of the capacitor 13 are supplied with a power supply potential Vdd, and an opposite electrode of the light emitting element 14 is supplied with a ground potential.
- amorphous silicon for a semiconductor layer of the TFT 12 which controls a current value supplied to the light emitting element that is, a drive TFT
- Vth threshold voltage
- the same potential is applied to different pixels through the signal line 15
- current flowing to the light emitting element 14 differs from pixel to pixel and display luminance becomes nonuniform among pixels.
- characteristics of the transistor are deteriorated or varied likewise.
- the pixel shown in FIG. 47 includes a transistor 21 , a drive transistor 22 which controls a current value supplied to a light emitting element 24 , a capacitor 23 , and the light emitting element 24 , and the pixel is connected to a signal line 25 and a scan line 26 .
- the drive transistor 22 is an NMOS transistor; either a source electrode or a drain electrode of the drive transistor 22 is supplied with a ground potential; and an opposite electrode of the light emitting element 24 is supplied with Vca.
- FIG. 48 A timing chart showing the operation of this pixel is shown in FIG. 48 .
- one frame period is divided into an initialization period 31 , a threshold (Vth) write period 32 , a data write period 33 , and a light emitting period 34 .
- the one frame period corresponds to a period for displaying an image for one screen, and the initialization period, the threshold (Vth) write period, and the data write period are collectively referred to as an address period.
- a threshold voltage of the drive transistor 22 is written into the capacitor.
- a data voltage (Vdata) showing a luminance of the pixel is written into the capacitor, and thus Vdata+Vth is accumulated in the capacitor.
- the drive transistor 22 is turned on, so that the light emitting element 24 emits light at a luminance specified by the data voltage by changing Vca. Such operation reduces a variation in luminance due to fluctuation in threshold voltage of a drive transistor.
- Reference 3 also discloses that a voltage corresponding to the sum of a data potential and a threshold voltage of a drive TFT is a gate-source voltage and current flowing to the TFT does not change even when the threshold voltage of the TFT is changed (Reference 3: Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2004-280059).
- the initialization, the writing of a threshold voltage, and the light emission described above are performed by changing a potential Vca several times in each one frame period.
- one electrode of a light emitting element to which Vca is supplied that is, an opposite electrode is formed entirely over a pixel region. Therefore, the light emitting element cannot emit light if there is even a single pixel which performs data writing operation besides initialization and writing of a threshold voltage.
- a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period i.e. a duty ratio
- a low duty ratio requires a high current value supplied to the light emitting element or a drive transistor, which results in increases of a voltage applied to the light emitting element and power consumption.
- the light emitting element or the drive transistor becomes easily deteriorated; therefore, much more power is required to obtain a luminance equivalent to that before deterioration.
- the opposite electrode since the opposite electrode is connected to all pixels, the light emitting element functions as an element with large capacitance. Therefore, more power needs to be consumed to change the potential of the opposite electrode.
- the scope of the present invention is not limited only to a display device having a light emitting element, and it is an object of the present invention to suppress variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of a transistor. Therefore, a destination supplied with current controlled by a drive transistor is not limited to the light emitting element.
- One aspect of the present invention provides a semiconductor device having a pixel including a transistor, a first switch, and a second switch, in which one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a gate electrode of the transistor through the first switch, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a pixel electrode, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the second switch, and a signal in accordance with a gray scale level of the pixel is inputted to the gate electrode of the transistor.
- One aspect of the present invention provides a semiconductor device including a storage capacitor, a transistor, a first switch, a second switch, and a third switch, in which one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a first wiring, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a pixel electrode, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a second wiring through the third switch, a gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a third wiring through the first switch, the gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the first wiring through the second switch, and the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the gate electrode through the storage capacitor.
- One aspect of the present invention provides a semiconductor device including a capacitor, a transistor, a first switch, a second switch, and a third switch, in which one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a first wiring, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a pixel electrode, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a second wiring through the third switch, a gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a third wiring through the first switch, the gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the first wiring through the second switch, and the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the gate electrode through the capacitor.
- One aspect of the present invention provides a semiconductor device including a transistor, a capacitor, a first switch, a second switch, a third switch, and a fourth switch, in which one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a first wiring through the fourth switch, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a pixel electrode, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a second wiring through the third switch, a gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a third wiring through the first switch, the gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the first wiring through the second switch, and the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the gate electrode through the capacitor.
- One aspect of the present invention provides a semiconductor device including a transistor, a capacitor, a first switch, a second switch, a third switch, and a fourth switch, in which one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a first wiring, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a pixel electrode through the fourth switch, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a second wiring through the fourth switch and the third switch, a gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a third wiring through the first switch, the gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the first wiring through the second switch, and the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the gate electrode through the fourth switch and the capacitor.
- the second wiring may be the same as a wiring which controls the third switch.
- the second wiring may be any of scan lines which control first to third switches of a preceding row or a subsequent row.
- the transistor may be an n-channel transistor. Further, a semiconductor layer of the transistor may be formed of a non-crystalline semiconductor film. Furthermore, the semiconductor layer of the transistor may be formed of amorphous silicon.
- the semiconductor layer of the transistor may be formed of a crystalline semiconductor film.
- a potential inputted to the first wiring may have two values V 1 and V 2 , the potential may be V 2 when the first to third switches are in an off state, V 1 may be a potential higher than a potential inputted to the second wiring, the difference between V 1 and V 2 may be larger than a threshold voltage of the transistor, and V 2 may be higher than V 1 .
- the transistor may be a p-channel transistor.
- a potential inputted to the first wiring may have two values V 1 and V 2
- the potential may be V 2 when the first to third switches are in an off state
- V 1 may be a potential lower than a potential inputted to the second wiring
- the difference between V 1 and V 2 may be larger than an absolute value of a threshold voltage of the transistor
- V 2 may be lower than V 1 .
- One aspect of the present invention provides a semiconductor device including a transistor of which one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode is electrically connected to a first wiring and the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode is electrically connected to a second wiring, a storage capacitor which holds a gate-source voltage of the transistor, a means to hold a first voltage in the storage capacitor by applying a first potential which is inputted to the first wiring to a gate electrode of the transistor and applying a second potential which is inputted to the second wiring to the source electrode of the transistor, a means to discharge a voltage of the storage capacitor down to a second voltage, a means to hold a fifth voltage that is the sum of the second voltage and a fourth voltage in the storage capacitor by applying a potential that is the sum of the first potential and a third voltage to the gate electrode of the transistor, and a means to supply current set for the transistor to a load by inputting a third potential that is different from the first potential to the first wiring.
- One aspect of the present invention provides a semiconductor device including a transistor in which one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode is electrically connected to a first wiring and the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode is electrically connected to a second wiring, a storage capacitor which holds a gate-source voltage of the transistor, a means to hold a first voltage in the storage capacitor by applying a first potential which is inputted to the first wiring to a gate electrode of the transistor and applying a second potential inputted to the second wiring to the source electrode of the transistor, a means to discharge a voltage of the storage capacitor down to a threshold voltage of the transistor, a means to hold a fourth voltage that is the sum of the threshold voltage of the transistor and a third voltage by applying a potential that is the sum of the first potential and a second voltage to the gate electrode of the transistor, and a means to supply current set for the transistor to a load by inputting a third potential that is different from the first potential to the first wiring.
- the transistor may be an n-channel transistor. Further, a semiconductor layer of the transistor may be formed of a non-crystalline semiconductor film. Furthermore, the semiconductor layer of the transistor may be formed of amorphous silicon.
- the semiconductor layer of the transistor may be formed of a crystalline semiconductor film.
- the first potential may be a potential higher than the second potential
- the difference between the first potential and the second potential may be larger than a threshold voltage of the transistor
- the first potential may be lower than the third potential
- the transistor may be a p-channel transistor.
- the first potential may be a potential lower than the second potential
- the difference between the first potential and the second potential may be larger than the absolute value of the threshold voltage of the transistor
- the first potential may be higher than the third potential.
- One aspect of the present invention provides a display device including the above-described semiconductor device. In addition, it also provides an electronic device having the display device in a display portion.
- the switch described in this specification is not particularly limited and may be an electrical switch or a mechanical switch as long as it can control current flow.
- the switch may be a transistor, a diode, or a logic circuit that is a combination thereof.
- the transistor operates as a mere switch. Therefore, the polarity (conductivity type) of the transistor is not particularly limited. However, it is desirable to use a transistor having a polarity with lower off-current.
- a transistor provided with an LDD region, a transistor having a multi-gate structure, or the like can be used.
- n-channel transistor when a transistor to be operated as a switch operates in a state where the potential of a source electrode thereof is close to a lower potential side power source (such as Vss, GND, or 0 V), whereas it is desirable to use a p-channel transistor when the transistor operates in a state where the potential of a source electrode thereof is close to a higher potential side power source (such as Vdd).
- a lower potential side power source such as Vss, GND, or 0 V
- p-channel transistor when the transistor operates in a state where the potential of a source electrode thereof is close to a higher potential side power source (such as Vdd).
- Vdd potential side power source
- the switch may be of CMOS type using both an n-channel transistor and a p-channel transistor.
- the load may be anything.
- a display medium of which contrast varies by an electromagnetic action such as a liquid crystal element or electronic ink can be used as well as a light emitting element such as an EL element (an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element, or an EL element containing an organic material and an inorganic material) or an electron emitting element.
- a field emission display (FED), an SED flat-panel display (SED: Surface-conduction Electron-emitter Display), or the like can be given as an example of a display device using an electron emitting element.
- electronic paper can be given as a display device using electronic ink.
- a thin film transistor using a non-single crystal semiconductor film typified by an amorphous silicon film or a polycrystalline silicon film, a transistor formed using a semiconductor substrate or an SOI substrate, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, or a bipolar transistor, a transistor using an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube, or another transistor can be used.
- the kind of substrate where the transistor is located and the transistor can be located over a single crystalline substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a plastic substrate, or the like.
- the transistor in the present invention may be of any type and may be formed over any type of substrate. Accordingly, all circuits may be formed over a glass substrate, a plastic substrate, a single crystalline substrate, an SOI substrate, or any other substrates. Alternatively, a part of the circuits may be formed over a substrate, and another part of the circuits may be formed over another substrate. In other words, all of the circuits are not necessarily formed over the same substrate. For example, a part of the circuits may be formed over a glass substrate using TFTs, another part of the circuits may be formed as an IC chip over a single crystalline substrate, and the IC chip may be connected onto the glass substrate by COG (Chip On Glass). Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to the glass substrate by TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or using a printed circuit board.
- TAB Pe Automated Bonding
- one pixel means a color element. Accordingly, in the case of a full-color display device including R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color elements, one pixel means any one of R, G, and B color elements.
- pixels are arranged in matrix in this specification includes the case where when full-color display is performed with three color elements (e.g. RGB), pixels of three color elements constituting the smallest unit of an image are arranged in a so-called delta pattern as well as the case where pixels are arranged in a grid pattern formed by a combination of vertical stripes and horizontal stripes.
- the sizes of the pixels may be different from color element to color element.
- semiconductor device in this specification means a device including a circuit including a semiconductor element (such as a transistor or a diode).
- display device includes not only a main body of a display panel in which a plurality of pixels including a load and a peripheral driver circuit for driving the pixels are formed over a substrate but also a display panel with a flexible printed circuit (FPC) or a printed wiring board (PWB) attached thereto.
- FPC flexible printed circuit
- PWB printed wiring board
- a desired current can be supplied to a load such as a light emitting element.
- a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 1.
- FIG. 2 is a timing chart for explaining operation of the pixel shown in FIG. 1 .
- FIGS. 3A to 3 D are diagrams illustrating operation of the pixel shown in FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 1.
- FIG. 5 is a model diagram of a voltage-current characteristic in accordance with channel length modulation.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display device described in Embodiment Mode 1.
- FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 3.
- FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 3.
- FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 3.
- FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 4.
- FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 4.
- FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 5.
- FIG. 13 is a timing chart for explaining operation of the pixel shown in FIG. 12 .
- FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 7.
- FIG. 15 is a timing chart for explaining operation of the pixel shown in FIG. 14 .
- FIGS. 16A to 16 D are diagrams illustrating operation of the pixel shown in FIG. 14.
- FIG. 17 is a fragmentary sectional view of a pixel described in Embodiment Mode 8.
- FIGS. 18A and 18B are diagrams illustrating light emitting elements described in Embodiment Mode 8.
- FIGS. 19A to 19 C are diagrams illustrating extraction directions of light described in Embodiment Mode 8.
- FIGS. 20A and 20B are fragmentary sectional views of pixels described in Embodiment Mode 8.
- FIGS. 21A and 21B are fragmentary sectional views of pixels described in Embodiment Mode 8.
- FIGS. 22A and 22B are fragmentary sectional views of pixels described in Embodiment Mode 8.
- FIG. 23 is a fragmentary sectional view of a pixel described in Embodiment Mode 8.
- FIG. 24 is a fragmentary sectional view of a pixel described in Embodiment Mode 8.
- FIGS. 25A and 25B are diagrams illustrating a display device described in Embodiment Mode 9.
- FIGS. 26A and 26B are diagrams illustrating display devices described in Embodiment Mode 9.
- FIGS. 27A and 27B are diagrams illustrating display devices described in Embodiment Mode 9.
- FIG. 28 is a fragmentary sectional view of a pixel described in Embodiment Mode 9.
- FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 6.
- FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 6.
- FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 6.
- FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 7.
- FIGS. 33A to 33 H are diagrams illustrating electronic devices to which the present invention can be applied.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a cellular phone.
- FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of an EL module.
- FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing main components of an EL television receiver.
- FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 6.
- FIG. 38 is a top view of the pixel shown in FIG. 4 .
- FIGS. 39A and 39B are diagrams illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 2.
- FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating write operation of a display device described in Embodiment Mode 1.
- FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 5.
- FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating a driving method which combines a digital gray scale method and a time gray scale method.
- FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 6.
- FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 6.
- FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 1.
- FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure of conventional art.
- FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure of conventional art.
- FIG. 48 is a timing chart for operating a pixel described in Related Art.
- FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period when using conventional art.
- the pixel shown in FIG. 1 includes a transistor 111 , a first switch 112 , a second switch 113 , a third switch 114 , a capacitor 115 , and a light emitting element 116 .
- the pixel is connected to a signal line 117 , a first scan line 118 , a second scan line 119 , a third scan line 120 , a power supply line 121 , and a potential supply line 122 .
- the transistor 111 is an n-channel transistor and is turned on when a gate-source voltage (Vgs) thereof exceeds a threshold voltage (Vth).
- a pixel electrode of the light emitting element 116 is an anode and an opposite electrode 123 is a cathode.
- the gate-source voltage of the transistor is referred to as Vgs; a drain-source voltage, Vds; a threshold voltage, Vth; a voltage accumulated in the capacitor, Vcs; and the power supply line 121 , the potential supply line 122 , and the signal line 117 are also referred to as a first wiring, a second wiring, and a third wiring, respectively.
- a first electrode (one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode) of the transistor 111 is connected to the pixel electrode of the light emitting element 116 ; a second electrode (the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode) thereof is connected to the power supply line 121 ; and a gate electrode thereof is connected to the power supply line 121 through the second switch 113 .
- the gate electrode of the transistor 111 is also connected to the signal line 117 through the first switch 112 , and the first electrode thereof is also connected to the potential supply line 122 through the third switch 114 .
- the capacitor 115 is connected between the gate electrode and the first electrode of the transistor 111 .
- a first electrode of the capacitor 115 is connected to the gate electrode of the transistor 111
- a second electrode of the capacitor 115 is connected to the first electrode of the transistor 111 .
- the capacitor 115 may be formed by sandwiching an insulating film between a wiring, a semiconductor layer, and an electrode or can be omitted by using a gate capacitance of the transistor 111 . Such a means to hold a voltage is referred to as a storage capacitor.
- first switch 112 , the second switch 113 , and the third switch 114 are controlled to be turned on and off by inputting signals to the first scan line 118 , the second scan line 119 , and the third scan line 120 , respectively.
- a signal in accordance with a gray scale level of the pixel which corresponds to a video signal, that is, a potential in accordance with luminance data is inputted to the signal line 117 .
- one frame period corresponding to a period for displaying an image for one screen is divided into an initialization period, a threshold write period, a data write period, and a light emitting period in FIG. 2 .
- the initialization period, the threshold write period, and the data write period are collectively referred to as an address period.
- the length of one frame period is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1/60 second or less so that an image viewer does not perceive flicker.
- a potential V 1 is inputted to the opposite electrode 123 of the light emitting element 116 and a potential V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ ( ⁇ : an arbitrary positive number) is inputted to the potential supply line 122 .
- the potential V 1 is inputted in the address period and a potential V 2 is inputted in the light emitting period. Note that V 2 >V 1 .
- the potential of the opposite electrode 123 of the light emitting element 116 is equal to the potential of the power supply line 121 in the address period for the purpose of explaining operation.
- V EL the minimum potential difference which is necessary for the light emitting element 116 to emit light
- V 2 of the power supply line 121 in the light emitting period is higher than the sum of the potential of the opposite electrode 123 and the minimum potential difference (V EL ) which is necessary for the light emitting element 116 to emit light.
- V EL minimum potential difference
- the first switch 112 is turned off and the second switch 113 and the third switch 114 are turned on in the initialization period as shown in (A) in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3A .
- the first electrode of the transistor 111 serves as a source electrode, and a potential thereof is equal to that of the potential supply line 122 , which is V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ .
- a potential of the gate electrode of the transistor 111 is V 1 .
- the gate-source voltage Vgs of the transistor 111 is Vth+ ⁇ and thus the transistor 111 is turned on.
- Vth+ ⁇ is held by the capacitor 115 provided between the gate electrode and the first electrode of the transistor 111 .
- the potential supply line 122 has such a potential as to turn on the transistor 111 and the third switch 114 functions to select whether or not to supply such a potential as to turn on the transistor 111 to the first electrode.
- the third switch 114 is turned off in the threshold write period shown in (B) in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3B . Therefore, the potential of the first electrode, i.e. the source electrode of the transistor 111 rises gradually and when it reaches V 1 ⁇ Vth, in other words, when the gate-source voltage Vgs of the transistor 111 reaches the threshold voltage (Vth), the transistor 111 is turned off. Thus, a voltage held by the capacitor 115 is Vth.
- the first switch 112 is turned on and a potential (V 1 +Vdata) in accordance with luminance data is inputted from the signal line 117 after turning off the second switch 113 .
- the voltage Vcs held by the capacitor 115 can be represented by Formula (1) where capacitances of the capacitor 115 and the light emitting element 116 are referred to as C 1 and C 2 , respectively.
- Vcs Vth + Vdata ⁇ C ⁇ ⁇ 2 C ⁇ ⁇ 1 + C ⁇ ⁇ 2 ( 1 )
- the first switch 112 is turned off and the potential of the power supply line 121 is set to V 2 .
- the gate-source voltage Vgs of the transistor 111 is equal to Vth+Vdata, and current in accordance with this Vgs flows to the transistor 111 and the light emitting element 116 , so that the light emitting element 116 emits light.
- a current I flowing to the light emitting element is represented by Formula (3) when the transistor 111 is operated in the saturation region.
- a current I flowing to the light emitting element when the transistor 111 is operated in the linear region is represented by Formula (4).
- W denotes a channel width of the transistor 111 ; L, a channel length; ⁇ , a mobility; and Cox, a storage capacitance.
- the current flowing to the light emitting element 116 does not depend on the threshold voltage (Vth) of the transistor 111 regardless of whether the operation region of the transistor 111 is either the saturation region or the linear region. Therefore, variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of the transistor 111 can be suppressed and a current value in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to the light emitting element 116 .
- the transistor 111 when the transistor 111 is operated in the saturation region, variation in luminance due to deterioration of the light emitting element 116 can also be suppressed.
- V EL of the light emitting element 116 increases and the potential of the first electrode, that is, the source electrode of the transistor 111 rises.
- the source electrode of the transistor 111 is connected to the second electrode of the capacitor 115 ; the gate electrode of the transistor 111 is connected to the first electrode of the capacitor 115 ; and the gate electrode side is in a floating state. Therefore, in accordance with the rise in the source potential, the gate potential of the transistor 111 also increases by the same amount as the rise in the source potential.
- Vgs of the transistor 111 does not change. Therefore, the current flowing to the transistor 111 and the light emitting element 116 is not affected even if the light emitting element is deteriorated. Note that it is found also in Formula (3) that the current I flowing to the light emitting element does not depend on the source potential and a drain potential.
- a pinch off point moves to the source side and an effective channel length which substantially functions as a channel is reduced. This increases a current value.
- This phenomenon is referred to as channel length modulation.
- the pinch off point is a boundary portion at which the channel disappears and the thickness of the channel is 0 below the gate, and the pinch off voltage refers to a voltage when the pinch off point is at a drain edge. This phenomenon also occurs more easily as the channel length L is shorter.
- FIG. 5 a model diagram of a voltage-current characteristic in accordance with channel length modulation is shown in FIG. 5 . Note that the channel lengths L of the transistors (a), (b), (c) satisfy (a)>(b)>(c) in FIG. 5 .
- the channel length L of the transistor 111 is preferably longer.
- the channel length L of the transistor is preferably larger than the channel width W.
- the channel length L is preferably 10 ⁇ m to 50 ⁇ m inclusive and more preferably 15 ⁇ m to 40 ⁇ m inclusive.
- the channel length L and the channel width W are not limited thereto.
- a reverse bias voltage is applied to the light emitting element 116 in the initialization period, a shorted portion in the light emitting element can be insulated and deterioration of the light emitting element can be suppressed. Thus, the lifetime of the light emitting element can be extended.
- an EL element an organic EL elements an inorganic EL element, or an EL element containing an organic material and an inorganic material
- an electron emitting element a liquid crystal element, electronic ink, or the like
- the transistor 111 functions to control a current value supplied to the light emitting element 116 , and the kind of the transistor is not particularly limited. Therefore, a thin film transistor (TFT) using a crystalline semiconductor film, a thin film transistor using a non-single crystalline semiconductor film typified by an amorphous silicon film or a polycrystalline silicon film, a transistor formed using a semiconductor substrate or an SOI substrate, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, a bipolar transistor, a transistor using an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube, or another transistor can be used.
- TFT thin film transistor
- the first switch 112 selects timing to input a signal in accordance with a gray scale level of the pixel to the capacitor and controls a signal supplied to the gate electrode of the transistor 111 .
- the second switch 113 selects timing to apply a predetermined potential to the gate electrode of the transistor 111 and controls whether or not to supply the predetermined potential to the gate electrode of the transistor 111 .
- the third switch 114 selects timing to apply a predetermined potential for initializing a potential written in the capacitor 115 and decreases the potential of the first electrode of the transistor 111 . Therefore, the first switch 112 , the second switch 113 , and the third switch 114 are not particularly limited as long as they have the above functions.
- each of the switches may be a transistor, a diode, or a logic circuit that is a combination thereof.
- the first to third switches are not particularly necessary if the signal or potential can be applied to the pixel at the above timing.
- the first switch 112 does not need to be provided as shown in FIG. 45 .
- a pixel shown in FIG. 45 includes a transistor 111 , a second switch 113 , a third switch 114 , and a pixel electrode 4540 .
- a first electrode (one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode) of the transistor 111 is connected to the pixel electrode 4540 and the third switch 114 , and a gate electrode of the transistor 111 is connected to a second electrode of the transistor 111 through the second switch 113 .
- a gate capacitance 4515 of the transistor 111 is used as a storage capacitor; therefore, the capacitor 115 in FIG. 1 does not particularly need to be provided.
- Such a pixel can also suppress variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of the transistor 111 by operating each switch in accordance with the timing chart shown in FIG. 2 and supplying a desired potential to each electrode. Thus, a desired current can be supplied to the pixel electrode 4540 .
- FIG. 4 the case of employing n-channel transistors as the first switch 112 , the second switch 113 , and the third switch 114 is shown in FIG. 4 .
- a common reference numeral is shared with FIG. 1 to denote a common component, and explanation thereof is omitted.
- a first switching transistor 412 corresponds to the first switch 112 ; a second switching transistor 413 , the second switch 113 ; and a third switching transistor 414 , the third switch 114 .
- the channel length of the transistor 111 is preferably larger than that of any of the first switching transistor 412 , the second switching transistor 413 , and the third switching transistor 414 .
- a gate electrode of the first switching transistor 412 is connected to a first scan line 118 ; a first electrode thereof, to a signal line 117 ; and a second electrode thereof, to a first electrode of a capacitor 115 and a gate electrode of the transistor 111 .
- a gate electrode of the second switching transistor 413 is connected to a second scan line 119 ; a first electrode thereof, to the first electrode of the capacitor 115 and the gate electrode of the transistor 111 ; and a second electrode thereof, to a power supply line 121 and a second electrode of the transistor 111 .
- a gate electrode of the third switching transistor 414 is connected to a third scan line 120 ; a first electrode thereof, to a second electrode of the capacitor 115 , a first electrode of the transistor 111 , and a pixel electrode of a light emitting element 116 ; and a second electrode thereof, to a potential supply line 122 .
- Each switching transistor is turned on when a signal inputted to each scan line is at an H level and turned off when the signal inputted is at an L level.
- a conductive layer 3810 includes a portion functioning as the first scan line 118 and the gate electrode of the first switching transistor 412
- a conductive layer 3811 includes a portion functioning as the signal line 117 and the first electrode of the first switching transistor 412
- a conductive layer 3812 includes a portion functioning as the second electrode of the first switching transistor 412 , a portion functioning as the first electrode of the capacitor 115 , and a portion functioning as the first electrode of the second switching transistor 413
- a conductive layer 3813 includes a portion functioning as the gate electrode of the second switching transistor 413 and is connected to the second scan line 119 through a wiring 3814 .
- a conductive layer 3822 includes a portion functioning as the second electrode of the second switching transistor 413 and a portion functioning as the second electrode of the transistor 111 and is connected to the power supply line 121 through a wiring 3815 .
- a conductive layer 3816 includes a portion functioning as the first electrode of the transistor 111 and is connected to a pixel electrode 3844 of the light emitting element.
- a conductive layer 3817 includes a portion functioning as the gate electrode of the transistor 111 and is connected to the conductive layer 3812 through a wiring 3818 .
- a conductive layer 3819 includes a portion functioning as the third scan line 120 and the gate electrode of the third switching transistor 414 .
- a conductive layer 3820 includes a portion functioning as the first electrode of the third switching transistor 414 and is connected to the pixel electrode 3844 .
- a conductive layer 3821 including a portion functioning as the second electrode of the third switching transistor 414 is connected to the potential supply line 122 through a wiring 3823 .
- the portions functioning as the gate electrode, the first electrode, and the second electrode of the first switching transistor 412 are portions formed so as to be overlapped with a semiconductor layer 3833 ; the portions functioning as the gate electrode, the first electrode, and the second electrode of the second switching transistor 413 are portions formed so as to be overlapped with a semiconductor layer 3834 ; and the portions functioning as the gate electrode, the first electrode, and the second electrode of the third switching transistor 414 are portions formed so as to be overlapped with a semiconductor layer 3835 .
- the portions functioning as the gate electrode, the first electrode, and the second electrode of the transistor 111 are portions of conductive layers formed so as to be overlapped with a semiconductor layer 3836 .
- the capacitor 115 is formed in a portion where the conductive layer 3812 and the pixel electrode 3844 overlap.
- the pixel structure in FIG. 4 can also suppress variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of the transistor 111 by an operating method similar to FIG. 1 .
- current in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to the light emitting element 116 , and variation in luminance can be suppressed.
- the transistor 111 is operated in the saturation region, variation in luminance caused by deterioration of the light emitting element 116 can also be suppressed.
- a manufacturing process can be simplified because the pixel can be formed using only n-channel transistors.
- a non-crystalline semiconductor such as an amorphous semiconductor or a semi-amorphous semiconductor (also referred to as a microcrystalline semiconductor) can be used for a semiconductor layer of each transistor included in the pixel.
- amorphous silicon a-Si:H
- the manufacturing process can further be simplified by using these non-crystalline semiconductors. Accordingly, a reduction in manufacturing cost and an improvement in yield can be achieved.
- the first switching transistor 412 , the second switching transistor 413 , and the third switching transistor 414 are operated as mere switches. Therefore, the polarity (conductivity type) of the transistors is not particularly limited. However, it is desirable to use a transistor having a polarity with lower off-current. As the transistor with low off-current, a transistor provided with an LDD region, a transistor having a multi-gate structure, or the like can be used. Alternatively, the switch may be of CMOS type using both an n-channel transistor and a p-channel transistor.
- the display device includes a signal line driver circuit 611 , a scan line driver circuit 612 , and a pixel portion 613 , and the pixel portion 613 includes a plurality of signal lines S 1 to Sm which is arranged extending from the signal line driver circuit 611 in a column direction, a plurality of first scan lines G 1 _ 1 to Gn_ 1 , second scan lines G 1 _ 2 to Gn_ 2 , third scan lines G 1 _ 3 to Gn_ 3 , and power supply lines P 1 _ 1 to Pn_ 1 which are arranged extending from the scan line driver circuit 612 in a row direction, and a plurality of pixels 614 which is arranged in matrix in accordance with the signal lines S 1 to Sm.
- the pixel portion 613 includes a plurality of potential supply lines P 1 _ 2 to Pn_ 2 parallel to the first scan lines G 1 _ 1 to Gn_ 1 .
- each pixel 614 is connected to a signal line Sj (one of the signal lines S 1 to Sm), a first scan line Gi_ 1 (one of the scan lines G 1 _ 1 to Gn_ 1 ), a second scan line Gi_ 2 , a third scan line Gi_ 3 , a power supply line Pi_ 1 , and a potential supply line Pi_ 2 .
- the signal line Sj, the first scan line Gi_ 1 , the second scan line Gi_ 2 , the third scan line Gi_ 3 , the power supply line Pi_ 1 , and the potential supply line Pi_ 2 correspond to the signal line 117 , the first scan line 118 , the second scan line 119 , the third scan line 120 , the power supply line 121 , and the potential supply line 122 in FIG. 1 , respectively.
- a row of pixels to be operated is selected, and at the same time, the operation shown in FIG. 2 is performed in each of the pixels belonging to the row. Note that in the data write period of FIG. 2 , a video signal outputted from the signal line driver circuit 611 is written into each pixel of the selected row. At this time, potentials in accordance with luminance data of pixels are inputted to the signal lines S 1 to Sm.
- FIG. 40 shows only the operation of the first switch 112 of FIG. 2 which can precisely show the period.
- a pixel that has finished the data write period in the i-th row proceeds to a light emitting period and emits light in accordance with the signal written into the pixel.
- initialization start time can be freely set in respective rows unless data write periods overlap in the respective rows.
- a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period (that is, a duty ratio) can be significantly high and can be approximately 100%. Therefore, a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided.
- a threshold write period can be set to be long, a threshold voltage of a transistor can be written into a capacitor more accurately. Therefore, reliability as a display device is improved.
- the structure of the display device shown in FIG. 6 is one example, and the present invention is not limited to this.
- the potential supply lines P 1 _ 2 to Pn_ 2 do not need to be arranged parallel to the first scan lines G 1 _ 1 to Gn_ 1 , and may be arranged parallel to the signal lines S 1 to Sm.
- the variation in threshold voltage includes fluctuation in threshold voltage of each transistor over time as well as a difference in threshold voltage among transistors of pixels.
- the difference in threshold voltage among transistors includes a difference in transistor characteristic at the time of manufacturing the transistors. Note that the transistor here refers to a transistor functioning to supply current to a load such as a light emitting element.
- Embodiment Mode 1 a pixel with a structure different from Embodiment Mode 1 is explained with reference to FIGS. 39A and 39B .
- a common reference numeral is used to denote a component similar to Embodiment Mode 1, and detailed explanation of the same portion or a portion having a similar function is omitted.
- the pixel shown in FIG. 39A includes a transistor 111 , a first switch 112 , a second switch 113 , a rectifier element 3914 , a capacitor 115 , and a light emitting element 116 . Note that the pixel is connected to a signal line 117 , a first scan line 118 , a second scan line 119 , a third scan line 3920 , and a power supply line 121 .
- the pixel shown in FIG. 39A has a structure in which the rectifier element 3914 is used as the third switch 114 in FIG.
- the rectifier element 3914 is connected so that current flows to the third scan line 3920 from the first electrode of the transistor 111 . It is needless to say that transistors or the like may be used as the first switch 112 and the second switch 113 as described in Embodiment Mode 1.
- a Schottky-barrier diode 3951 for the rectifier element 3914 , a Schottky-barrier diode 3951 , a PIN diode 3952 , or a PN diode 3953 or a diode-connected transistor 3954 or 3955 shown in FIG. 39B can be used. Note that, as for the transistors 3954 and 3955 , the polarity of the transistors needs to be appropriately selected depending on a direction of current flow.
- a potential of the L-level signal is considered to be V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ - ⁇ ( ⁇ : an arbitrary positive number) because it is required not only that current flow to the rectifier element 3914 but also that a potential of the second electrode of the capacitor 115 be lowered to V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ ( ⁇ : an arbitrary positive number).
- ⁇ denotes a threshold voltage of the rectifier element 3914 in a forward direction.
- the pixel structure of FIGS. 39A and 39B can also suppress variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of the transistor 111 by operating the pixel in a similar manner to FIG. 1 .
- current in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to the light emitting element 116 , and variation in luminance can be suppressed.
- variation in luminance caused by deterioration of the light emitting element 116 can also be suppressed.
- the use of the rectifier element 3914 can reduce the number of wirings and improve an aperture ratio.
- the pixel described in this embodiment mode can be applied to the display device of FIG. 6 .
- initialization start time can be freely set in respective rows unless data write periods in the respective rows overlap.
- a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period that is, a duty ratio
- a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided.
- a threshold write period can be set to be long, a threshold voltage of a transistor which controls a current value flowing to a light emitting element can be written into a capacitor more accurately. Therefore, reliability as a display device is improved.
- This embodiment mode can be freely combined with a pixel structure described in the other embodiment mode as well as FIG. 1 described above.
- the rectifier element 3914 can be applied to a pixel described in the other embodiment mode.
- pixels having structures different from those in Embodiment Mode 1 are explained with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9 .
- a common reference numeral is used to denote a component similar to Embodiment Mode 1, and detailed explanation of the same portion or a portion having a similar function is omitted.
- a pixel 700 shown in FIG. 7 includes a transistor 111 , a first switch 112 , a second switch 113 , a third switch 114 , a capacitor 115 , and a light emitting element 116 . Note that the pixel 700 is connected to a signal line 117 , a first scan line 718 , a second scan line 119 , a third scan line 120 , a power supply line 121 , and a first pixel line 718 of a subsequent row.
- the first electrode of the transistor 111 is connected to the potential supply line 122 through the third switch 114 , while it can be connected to the first scan line 718 of the subsequent row in FIG. 7 .
- the potential supply line 112 can be replaced with anything that can supply a predetermined potential to the first electrode of the transistor 111 in the initialization period. Therefore, a supplying wiring does not always need to be at a constant potential as long as the wiring can supply a predetermined potential to the first electrode of the transistor 111 in the initialization period.
- the first scan line 718 of the subsequent row can be used in place of the potential supply line.
- the pixel structure shown in FIG. 7 can also suppress variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of the transistor 111 by operating the pixel in a similar manner to Embodiment Mode 1.
- current in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to the light emitting element 116 , and variation in luminance can be suppressed.
- power consumption can be reduced because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential.
- the operation region of the transistor 111 is not particularly limited, a more notable effect can be obtained in the saturation region. Further, when the transistor 111 is operated in the saturation region, variation in current flowing to the transistor 111 caused by deterioration of the light emitting element 116 can be suppressed.
- a potential of a signal to turn off the first switch 112 which is supplied from the first scan line 718 is V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ ( ⁇ : an arbitrary positive number). Therefore, it is necessary to use the first switch 112 which is turned off with the potential V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ ( ⁇ : an arbitrary positive number). It is also necessary to perform operation so that the initialization period of the row to which the pixel 700 belongs does not overlap with a data write period of the row sharing a wiring.
- a potential to turn off the third switch 114 which is supplied from the third scan line 120 may be lower than the potential V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ that is the potential of the signal to turn off the first switch 112 which is supplied from the first scan line 718 .
- a gate-source voltage when the transistor is turned off can be a negative value.
- current leakage when the third switch 114 is turned off can be reduced.
- a second scan line 819 of a subsequent row may also be used as the potential supply line 122 of FIG. 1 .
- the pixel 800 can also perform similar operation to Embodiment Mode 1. Note that a potential of a signal to turn off the second switch 113 which is supplied from the second scan line 819 is V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ ( ⁇ : an arbitrary positive number). Therefore, it is necessary to use the second switch 113 which is turned off with the potential V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ ( ⁇ : an arbitrary positive number). It is also necessary to perform operation so that the initialization period of the row to which the pixel 800 belongs does not overlap with a threshold write period of the row sharing a wiring.
- a potential of a signal to turn off the third switch 114 which is supplied from the third scan line 120 may be lower than the potential V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ that is the potential of the signal to turn off the second switch 113 which is supplied from the second scan line 819 . In this case, current leakage when the third switch 114 is turned off can be reduced.
- the potential supply line 122 of FIG. 1 may also be used as a third scan line 920 of a preceding row.
- the pixel 900 can also perform similar operation to Embodiment Mode 1.
- a potential of a signal to turn off a third switch 114 which is supplied from the third scan line 920 is V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ ( ⁇ : an arbitrary positive number). Therefore, it is necessary to use the third switch 114 which is turned off with the potential V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ ( ⁇ : an arbitrary positive number).
- this embodiment mode describes the case of using the potential supply line 122 of FIG. 1 also as a scan line of a subsequent or preceding row, any other wiring can be used as long as it can supply the potential V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ ( ⁇ : an arbitrary positive number) in the initialization period.
- initialization start time can be freely set in respective rows in the display device within the range in which there is limitation on operation of each of the pixels shown in FIGS. 7 to 9 and data write periods in the respective rows do not overlap.
- a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period that is, a duty ratio
- a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided.
- a threshold write period can be set to be long, a threshold voltage of a transistor which controls a current value flowing to a light emitting element can be written into a capacitor more accurately. Therefore, reliability as a display device is improved.
- This embodiment mode can be freely combined with any of the pixel structures described in Embodiment Modes 1 and 2 besides FIG. 1 described above.
- Embodiment Mode 1 a pixel having a structure different from Embodiment Mode 1 is explained with reference to FIG. 10 .
- a common reference numeral is used to denote a component similar to Embodiment Mode 1, and detailed explanation of the same portion or a portion having a similar function is omitted.
- a pixel shown in FIG. 10 includes a transistor 1011 , a first switch 112 , a second switch 113 , a third switch 114 , a capacitor 115 , and a light emitting element 116 . Note that the pixel is connected to a signal line 117 , a first scan line 118 , a second scan line 119 , a third scan line 120 , a power supply line 121 , and a potential supply line 122 .
- the transistor 1011 in this embodiment mode is a multi-gate transistor in which two transistors are connected in series, and is provided in the same position as the transistor 111 in Embodiment Mode 1. Note that the number of transistors connected in series is not particularly limited.
- a channel length L of the transistor 1011 in this embodiment mode is equal to the sum of channel lengths of the respective transistors.
- a current value which is closer to a constant value can be easily obtained in the saturation region regardless of a drain-source voltage Vds.
- the transistor 1011 is effective when it is difficult to manufacture a transistor having a long channel length L. Note that a connection portion of the two transistors functions as a resistor.
- a thin film transistor (TFT) using a crystalline semiconductor film a thin film transistor using a non-single crystalline semiconductor film typified by an amorphous silicon film or a polycrystalline silicon film, a transistor formed using a semiconductor substrate or an SOI substrate, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, or a bipolar transistor, a transistor using an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube, or another transistor can be used.
- TFT thin film transistor
- transistors can be used for the first switch 112 , the second switch 113 , and the third switch 114 similarly to the pixel shown in FIG. 1 .
- the pixel described in this embodiment mode can be applied to the display device of FIG. 6 .
- initialization start time can be freely set in respective rows unless data write periods in the respective rows overlap.
- a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period that is, a duty ratio
- a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided.
- a threshold write period can be set to be long, a threshold voltage of a transistor which controls a current value flowing to a light emitting element can be written into a capacitor more accurately. Therefore, reliability as a display device is improved.
- the structure of the transistor 1011 is not limited to that in which transistors are connected in series, and may be that in which transistors are connected in parallel like a transistor 1111 shown in FIG. 11 .
- the transistor 1111 can supply larger current to the light emitting element 116 .
- This embodiment mode can also be applied to any of the pixel structures described in the other embodiment modes as well as FIG. 1 described above.
- a pixel shown in FIG. 12 includes a first transistor 1201 , a second transistor 1202 , a first switch 1212 , a second switch 1213 , a third switch 1214 , a fourth switch 1203 , a fifth switch 1204 , a capacitor 1215 , and a light emitting element 1216 .
- the pixel is connected to a signal line 1217 , a first scan line 1218 , a second scan line 1219 , a third scan line 1220 , a power supply line 1221 , and a potential supply line 1222 .
- the pixel is also connected to fourth and fifth scan lines which control the fourth switch 1203 and the fifth switch 1204 to be turned on and off.
- the first transistor 1201 and the second transistor 1202 are n-channel transistors, and each transistor is turned on when a gate-source voltage (Vgs) exceeds a threshold voltage.
- a pixel electrode of the light emitting element 1216 is an anode, and an opposite electrode 1223 thereof is a cathode.
- Vgs gate-source voltage of a transistor
- Vcs voltage accumulated in a capacitor
- a threshold voltage of the first transistor 1201 is referred to as Vth 1 and that of the second transistor 1202 is referred to as Vth 2 .
- the power supply line 1221 , the potential supply line 1222 , and the signal line 1217 are referred to as a first wiring, a second wiring, and a third wiring, respectively.
- a first electrode of the first transistor 1201 is connected to the pixel electrode of the light emitting element 1216 through the fourth switch 1203 ; a second electrode thereof, to the power supply line 1221 ; and a gate electrode thereof, to the power supply line 1221 through the second switch 1213 .
- the gate electrode of the first transistor 1201 is also connected to the signal line 1217 through the first switch 1212
- the first electrode of the first transistor 1201 is also connected to the potential supply line 1222 through the fourth switch 1203 and the third switch 1214 .
- a first electrode of the second transistor 1202 is connected to the pixel electrode of the light emitting element 1216 through the fifth switch 1204 ; a second electrode thereof, to the power supply line 1221 ; and a gate electrode thereof, to the power supply line 1221 through the second switch 1213 .
- the gate electrode of the second transistor 1202 is also connected to the signal line 1217 through the first switch 1212
- the first electrode of the second transistor 1202 is also connected to the potential supply line 1222 through the fifth switch 1204 and the third switch 1214 .
- the gate electrodes of the first transistor 1201 and the second transistor 1202 are connected to each other; the second electrodes of the first transistor 1201 and the second transistor 1202 are connected to each other; and the first electrodes of the first transistor 1201 and the second transistor 1202 are connected to each other though the fourth switch 1203 and the fifth switch 1204 .
- the connected gate electrodes of the first transistor 1201 and the second transistor 1202 are connected to the first electrode of the first transistor 1201 through the capacitor 1215 and the fourth switch 1203 and also connected to the first electrode of the second transistor 1202 through the capacitor 1215 and the fifth switch 1204 .
- a first electrode of the capacitor 1215 is connected to the gate electrodes of the first transistor 1201 and the second transistor 1202 and a second electrode of the capacitor 1215 is connected to the first electrodes of the first transistor 1201 and the second transistor 1202 through the respective switches.
- the capacitor 1215 may be formed by sandwiching an insulating film between a wiring, a semiconductor layer, and an electrode or can be omitted by using gate capacitances of the first transistor 1201 and the second transistor 1202 .
- first switch 1212 , the second switch 1213 , and the third switch 1214 are controlled to be turned on and off by inputting signals to the first scan line 1218 , the second scan line 1219 , and the third scan line 1220 , respectively.
- scan lines which control the fourth switch 1203 and the fifth switch 1204 to be turned on and off are omitted.
- a signal in accordance with a pixel gray scale level which corresponds to a video signal, that is, a potential in accordance with luminance data is inputted to the signal line 1217 .
- one frame period corresponding to a period for displaying an image for one screen in FIG. 13 is divided into an initialization period, a threshold write period, a data write period, and a light emitting period.
- a potential V 1 is supplied to the opposite electrode 1223 of the light emitting element 1216 , and when a higher value between Vth 1 and Vth 2 is referred to as Vth, a potential V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ ( ⁇ : an arbitrary positive number) is supplied to the potential supply line 1222 .
- the potential V 1 and a potential V 2 are supplied to the power supply line 1221 in an address period and in the light emitting period, respectively. Note that V 2 >V 1 .
- the potential of the opposite electrode 1223 of the light emitting element 1216 is equal to the potential of the power supply line 1221 in the address period for the purpose of explaining operation.
- V EL the minimum potential difference which is necessary for the light emitting element 1216 to emit light
- V 1 the potential of the opposite electrode 1223
- V 2 the potential of the power supply line 1221 in the light emitting period
- V EL the minimum potential difference
- the first switch 1212 and the fifth switch 1204 are turned off and the second switch 1213 , the third switch 1214 , and the fourth switch 1203 are turned on.
- the first electrode of the first transistor 1201 serves as a source electrode, and a potential thereof is V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ .
- a potential of the gate electrode of the first transistor 1201 is V 1 .
- a gate-source voltage Vgs of the first transistor 1201 is Vth+ ⁇ and thus the first transistor 1201 is turned on.
- Vth+ ⁇ is held by the capacitor 1215 positioned between the gate electrode and the first electrode of the first transistor 1201 .
- the third switch 1214 is turned off. Therefore, the potential of the first electrode, i.e. the source electrode of the first transistor 1201 rises gradually and when it reaches V 1 ⁇ Vth 1 , the first transistor 1201 is turned off. Thus, a voltage held by the capacitor 1215 is Vth 1 .
- the first switch 1212 is turned on and a potential (V 1 +Vdata) in accordance with luminance data is inputted from the signal line 1217 after turning off the second switch 1213 .
- the voltage Vcs held by the capacitor 1215 is Vth 1 +Vdata, and thus the first transistor 1201 is turned on. Note that when a potential Vdata ⁇ 0 is inputted, the first transistor 1201 can be turned off so that the light emitting element 1216 does not emit light.
- the first switch 1212 is turned off and the potential of the power supply line 1221 is set to V 2 .
- the gate-source voltage Vgs of the first transistor 1201 is equal to Vth 1 +Vdata, and current in accordance with this Vgs flows to the first transistor 1201 and the light emitting element 1216 , so that the light emitting element 1216 emits light.
- the current flowing to the light emitting element 1216 does not depend on the threshold voltage (Vth 1 ) of the first transistor 1201 regardless of whether the operation region of the first transistor 1201 is either the saturation region or the linear region.
- the fourth switch 1203 is turned off and the second switch 1213 , the third switch 1214 , and the fifth switch 1204 are turned on.
- the first electrode of the second transistor 1202 serves as a source electrode, and a potential thereof is V 1 ⁇ Vth ⁇ .
- a potential of the gate electrode of the second transistor 1202 is V 1 .
- a gate-source voltage Vgs of the second transistor 1202 is Vth+ ⁇ , so that the second transistor 1202 is turned on.
- Vth+ ⁇ is held by the capacitor 1215 positioned between the gate electrode and the first electrode of the second transistor 1202 .
- the third switch 1214 is turned off. Therefore, the potential of the first electrode, i.e. the source electrode of the second transistor 1202 rises gradually and when it reaches V 1 ⁇ Vth 2 , the second transistor 1202 is turned off. Thus, a voltage held by the capacitor 1215 is Vth 2 .
- the first switch 1212 is turned on and a potential (V 1 +Vdata) in accordance with luminance data is inputted from the signal line 1217 after turning off the second switch 1213 .
- the voltage Vcs held by the capacitor 1215 is Vth 2 +Vdata, and thus the second transistor 1202 is turned on.
- the first switch 1212 is turned off and the potential of the power supply line 1221 is set to V 2 .
- the gate-source voltage Vgs of the second transistor 1202 is equal to Vth 2 +Vdata, and current in accordance with this Vgs flows to the second transistor 1202 and the light emitting element 1216 , so that the light emitting element 1216 emits light.
- the current flowing to the light emitting element 1216 does not depend on the threshold voltage (Vth 2 ) regardless of whether the operation region of the second transistor 1202 is either the saturation region or the linear region.
- the channel lengths L of these transistors are preferably long.
- a reverse bias voltage is applied to the light emitting element 1216 in the initialization period, a shorted portion in the light emitting element can be insulated and deterioration of the light emitting element can be suppressed. Thus, the lifetime of the light emitting element can be extended.
- an EL element an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element, or an EL element containing an organic material and an inorganic material
- an electron emitting element a liquid crystal element, electronic ink, or the like
- the first transistor 1201 and the second transistor 1202 function to control a current value supplied to the light emitting element 1216 , and the kind of the transistors is not particularly limited. Therefore, a thin film transistor (TFT) using a crystalline semiconductor film, a thin film transistor using a non-single crystalline semiconductor film typified by an amorphous silicon film or a polycrystalline silicon film, a transistor formed using a semiconductor substrate or an SOI substrate, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, a bipolar transistor, a transistor using an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube, or another transistor can be used.
- TFT thin film transistor
- the first switch 1212 selects timing to input a signal in accordance with a pixel gray scale level to the capacitor.
- the second switch 1213 selects timing to apply a predetermined potential to the gate electrode of the first transistor 1201 or the second transistor 1202 .
- the third switch 1214 selects timing to apply a predetermined potential for initializing a potential written in the capacitor 1215 . Therefore, the first switch 1212 , the second switch 1213 , and the third switch 1214 are not particularly limited as long as they have the above functions.
- each of the switches may be a transistor, a diode, or a logic circuit that is a combination thereof.
- the first to third switches are not particularly necessary if the signal or potential can be applied to the pixel at the above timing.
- the fourth switch 1203 and the fifth switch 1204 are also not particularly limited, each of which may be, for example, a transistor, a diode, or a logic circuit that is a combination thereof.
- a manufacturing process can be simplified because the pixel can be formed using only an n-channel transistors.
- a non-crystalline semiconductor such as an amorphous semiconductor or a semi-amorphous semiconductor (also referred to as a microcrystalline semiconductor) can be used for a semiconductor layer of each transistor included in the pixel.
- amorphous silicon a-Si:H
- the manufacturing process can further be simplified by using these non-crystalline semiconductors. Accordingly, a reduction in manufacturing cost and an improvement in yield can be achieved.
- the polarity (conductivity type) of the transistors is not particularly limited. However, it is desirable to use a transistor having a polarity with lower off-current.
- first transistor 1201 and the fourth switch 1203 , and the second transistor 1202 and the fifth switch 1204 are interchangeable as shown in FIG. 41 .
- first electrodes of the first transistor 1201 and the second transistor 1202 are connected to the gate electrodes of the first transistor 1201 and the second transistor 1202 through the capacitor 1215 .
- the second electrode of the first transistor 1201 is connected to the power supply line 1221 through the fourth switch 1203
- the second electrode of the second transistor 1202 is connected to the power supply line 1221 through the fifth switch 1204 .
- FIGS. 12 and 41 show the case where the number of elements arranged in parallel is two using a transistor and a switch as a set, that is, using the first transistor 1201 and the fourth switch 1203 as a set, and the second transistor 1202 and the fifth switch 1204 as a set.
- the number of elements arranged in parallel is not particularly limited.
- initialization start time can be freely set in respective rows similarly to Embodiment Mode 1 unless data write periods in the respective rows overlap.
- a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period that is, a duty ratio
- a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided.
- a threshold write period can be set to be long, a threshold voltage of a transistor which controls a current value flowing to a light emitting element can be written into a capacitor more accurately. Thus, reliability as a display device is improved.
- the potential supply line 1222 can also be used as a wiring of another row similarly to Embodiment Mode 3.
- a multi-gate transistor in which transistors are connected in series, or transistors arranged in parallel may be used for each of the first transistor 1201 and the second transistor 1202 .
- this embodiment mode can be applied to any of the pixel structures described in Embodiment Modes 1 to 4.
- Embodiment Mode 1 a pixel having a structure different from Embodiment Mode 1 is described.
- a common reference numeral is used to denote a component similar to Embodiment Mode 1, and detailed explanation of the same portion or a portion having a similar function is omitted. Note that such portions are operated in a similar manner to Embodiment Mode 1.
- this embodiment mode a pixel structure which forcibly prevents current from flowing to a light emitting element 116 is explained.
- this embodiment mode aims to obtain a display device in which an afterimage is hardly seen and moving image characteristics are excellent by forcibly putting a light emitting element into a non-light emitting state.
- a pixel shown in FIG. 29 includes a fourth switch 2901 in addition to the transistor 111 , the first switch 112 , the second switch 113 , the third switch 114 , the capacitor 115 , and the light emitting element 116 which are included in the pixel of FIG. 1 .
- the pixel is connected to a fourth scan line 2902 in addition to the signal line 117 , the first scan line 118 , the second scan line 119 , the third scan line 120 , the power supply line 121 , and the potential supply line 122 .
- the fourth switch 2901 is connected in parallel with the capacitor 115 . Therefore, the gate electrode and the first electrode of the transistor 111 are short-circuited when the fourth switch 2901 is turned on. Then, since a gate-source voltage of the transistor 111 held by the capacitor 115 can be 0 V, the transistor 111 is turned off and the light emitting element 116 can be put into a non-light emitting state. Note that the fourth switch 2901 can be controlled to be turned on and off by scanning pixels from row to row with a signal inputted to the fourth scan line 2902 .
- a signal written in the pixel is erased.
- an erase period in which the light emitting element is forcibly put in a non-light emitting state is provided until a subsequent initialization period.
- black display is inserted. Accordingly, an afterimage becomes less perceptible and moving image characteristics can be improved.
- the analog gray scale method includes a method to control the emission intensity of a light emitting element in an analog manner and a method to control the emission time of a light emitting element in an analog manner. Between the two, the method to control the emission intensity of a light emitting element in an analog manner is often used.
- the digital gray scale method a light emitting element is turned on/off by control in a digital manner to express a gray scale.
- the digital gray scale method has the advantage of high resistance to noise because processing can be performed using a digital signal.
- multiple level gray scale display is attempted by using another method in combination.
- a technique for multiple level gray scale display there are an area gray scale method in which light emission area of a pixel is weighted and selected to perform gray scale display and a time gray scale method in which light emission time is weighted and selected to perform gray scale display.
- one frame period is divided into a plurality of subframe periods (SFn) as shown in FIG. 42 .
- Each subframe period includes an address period (Ta) including an initialization period, a threshold write period, and a data write period and a light emitting period (Ts).
- Ta address period
- Ts data write period
- subframe periods the number of which corresponds to the number of display bits n, are provided in one frame period.
- a ratio of lengths of light emitting periods in respective subframe periods is set to satisfy 2 (n-1 ) : 2 (n-2) : . . .
- the length of a light emitting period of a lower-order bit is short. Therefore, when data write operation is started immediately upon termination of a light emitting period of a preceding subframe period, it overlaps with data write operation of the preceding subframe period, and thus normal operation cannot be performed. Therefore, by providing an erase period as described above in a subframe period, light emission shorter than data write periods necessary for all rows can be expressed. In other words, a light emitting period can be freely set.
- the present invention is effective particularly in the display analog gray scale method. Furthermore, it is effective to provide an erase period because a light emitting period can be freely set also in a method combining the digital gray scale method and the time gray scale method.
- the erase period may be provided by providing another switch in the path of current flow from the power supply line 121 to the pixel electrode of the light emitting element 116 through the transistor 111 and turning off the switch by scanning pixels row by row.
- FIG. 30 One of such structures is shown in FIG. 30 .
- a fourth switch 3001 is connected between the second electrode of the transistor 111 and the power supply line 121 , in addition to the pixel structure of FIG. 1 .
- the fourth switch 3001 is controlled to be turned on and off by a signal inputted to a fourth scan line 3002 .
- a fourth switch 3701 may be connected between the node 3003 and the first electrode of the transistor 111 as shown in FIG. 37 .
- the fourth switch 3701 is controlled to be turned on and off by a signal inputted to the fourth scan line 3702 .
- an erase period can be provided by turning off the fourth switch.
- power consumption can also be reduced by turning off the fourth switch in an initialization period.
- the erase period can be provided by connecting a fourth switch 4301 between the node 3003 and the pixel electrode of the light emitting element 116 as shown in FIG. 43 as well as FIGS. 30 and 37 .
- the erase period can be provided by connecting a fourth switch 4401 between a connection point of the second electrode of the transistor 111 and the second switch 113 , and the power supply line 121 as shown in FIG. 44 .
- the erase period may be forcibly provided by inputting a potential to the gate electrode of the transistor 111 .
- FIG. 31 One of such structures is shown in FIG. 31 .
- the structure of FIG. 31 includes a rectifier element 3101 in addition to the pixel structure of FIG. 1 , and the gate electrode of the transistor 111 and a fourth scan line 3102 are connected to each other through the rectifier element 3101 .
- the rectifier element 3101 is connected so that current flows from the gate electrode of the transistor 111 to the fourth scan line 3102 .
- an L-level signal is inputted only when forcibly turning off the transistor 111 , and otherwise, an H-level signal is inputted.
- the fourth scan line 3102 may be substituted with the first scan line 118 or the second scan line 119 .
- a pixel structure is not particularly limited to the above structure because an afterimage can be made less perceptible by inserting black display as long as the pixel structure includes a means to forcibly put a light emitting element into a non-light emitting state.
- the Schottky-barrier diode, the PIN diode, the PN diode, the diode-connected transistor, or the like shown in FIG. 39B can be used for the rectifier element 3101 .
- switch for providing the erase period described in this embodiment mode can be applied to the pixel structure described in any of the other embodiment modes as well as that of FIG. 1 described above.
- the initialization period can also serve as the erase period by setting the initialization period to be long.
- moving image characteristics can be improved by setting the length of a period in which black display is desired to be performed in order to make an afterimage less perceptible to be equal to that of the initialization period when operating any of the pixels described in Embodiment Modes 1 to 5.
- black display may be inserted by equalizing the potential of the power supply line 121 to the potential of the opposite electrode 123 in the light emitting period.
- the pixel structure shown in FIG. 37 can also suppress variation in potential of the second electrode of the capacitor 115 by turning off the fourth switch 3701 in the data write period also in, a voltage Vth+Vdata can be held by the capacitor 115 more accurately. Thus, more accurate current in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to the light emitting element 116 .
- the pixel described in this embodiment mode can be applied to the display device described in Embodiment Mode 1. Accordingly, a display device with less luminance variation and excellent moving image characteristics can be obtained.
- a pixel shown in FIG. 14 includes a transistor 1411 , a first switch 1412 , a second switch 1413 , a third switch 1414 , a capacitor 1415 , and a light emitting element 1416 .
- the pixel is connected to a signal line 1417 , a first scan line 1418 , a second scan line 1419 , a third scan line 1420 , a power supply line 1421 , and a potential supply line 1422 .
- the transistor 1411 is a p-channel transistor, and is turned on when the absolute value of its gate-source voltage (
- a pixel electrode of the light emitting element 1416 is a cathode and an opposite electrode 1423 thereof is an anode.
- the absolute value of a gate-source voltage of the transistor
- the absolute value of a threshold voltage
- a first electrode (one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode) of the transistor 1411 is connected to the pixel electrode of the light emitting element 1416 ; a second electrode (the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode) of the transistor 1411 , to the power supply line 1421 ; and a gate electrode of the second transistor 1411 , to the power supply line 1421 through the second switch 1413 .
- the gate electrode of the transistor 1411 is also connected to the signal line 1417 through the first switch 1412 , and the first electrode thereof is also connected to the potential supply line 1422 through the third switch 1414 .
- the capacitor 1415 is connected between the gate electrode and the first electrode of the transistor 1411 .
- a first electrode of the capacitor 1415 is connected to the gate electrode of the transistor 1411 and a second electrode thereof is connected to the first electrode of the transistor 1411 .
- the capacitor 1415 may be formed by sandwiching an insulating film between a wiring, a semiconductor layer, and an electrode or can be omitted by using a gate capacitance of the transistor 1411 .
- first switch 1412 , the second switch 1413 , and the third switch 1414 are controlled to be turned on and off by inputting signals to the first scan line 1418 , the second scan line 1419 , and the third scan line 1420 , respectively.
- a signal in accordance with a pixel gray scale level which corresponds to a video signal, that is, a potential in accordance with luminance data is inputted to the signal line 1417 .
- one frame period corresponding to a period for displaying an image for one screen in FIG. 14 is divided into an initialization period, a threshold write period, a data write period, and a light emitting period.
- the initialization period, the threshold write period, and the data write period are collectively referred to as an address period.
- the length of one frame period is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1/60 second or less so that an image viewer does not perceive flicker.
- V 1 is inputted to the opposite electrode 1423 of the light emitting element 1416 and a potential V 1 +
- V 1 is inputted in the address period and a potential V 2 is inputted in the light emitting period. Note that V 2 ⁇ V 1 .
- the potential of the opposite electrode 1423 of the light emitting element 1416 is equal to the potential of the power supply line 1421 in the address period for the purpose of explaining operation.
- V EL the minimum potential difference which is necessary for the light emitting element 1416 to emit light
- V 2 of the power supply line 1421 in the light emitting period is lower than a value obtained by subtracting the minimum potential difference (V EL ) which is necessary for the light emitting element 1416 to emit light from the potential of the opposite electrode 1423 .
- V EL minimum potential difference
- the first switch 1412 is turned off and the second switch 1413 and the third switch 1414 are turned on in the initialization period as shown in (A) in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16A .
- the first electrode of the transistor 1411 serves as a source electrode, and a potential thereof is equal to that of the potential supply line 1422 , that is, V 1 +
- a potential of the gate electrode of the transistor 1411 is V 1 .
- of the transistor 1411 is
- the third switch 1414 is turned off in the threshold write period shown in (B) in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16B . Therefore, the potential of the first electrode, i.e. the source electrode of the transistor 1411 drops gradually and when it reaches V 1 +
- the first switch 1412 is turned on and a potential (V 1 ⁇ Vdata) in accordance with luminance data is inputted from the signal line 1417 after turning off the second switch 1413 .
- the voltage Vcs held by the capacitor 1415 can be represented by Formula (5) where capacitances of the capacitor 1415 and the light emitting element 1416 are referred to as C 1 and C 2 , respectively.
- Vcs ⁇ - ⁇ Vth ⁇ - Vdata ⁇ C ⁇ ⁇ 2 C ⁇ ⁇ 1 + C ⁇ ⁇ 2 ⁇ ( 5 )
- the first switch 1412 is turned off and the potential of the power supply line 1421 is set to V 2 .
- the gate-source voltage Vgs of the transistor 1411 is equal to ⁇ Vdata ⁇
- a current I flowing to the light emitting element is represented by Formula (7) when the transistor 1411 is operated in the saturation region.
- Formula (9) can be transformed into Formula (10).
- I ( W L ) ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ Cox ⁇ [ ( - Vdata ) ⁇ Vds - 1 2 ⁇ Vds 2 ] ( 10 )
- W denotes a channel width of the transistor 1411 ; L, a channel length; ⁇ , a mobility; and Cox, a storage capacitance.
- the current flowing to the light emitting element 1416 does not depend on the threshold voltage (Vth) of the transistor 1411 regardless of whether the operation region of the transistor 1411 is either the saturation region or the linear region. Therefore, variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of the transistor 1411 can be suppressed and a current value in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to the light emitting element 1416 .
- the transistor 1411 when the transistor 1411 is operated in the saturation region, variation in luminance due to deterioration of the light emitting element 1416 can also be suppressed.
- V EL of the light emitting element 1416 increases and the potential of the first electrode, that is, the source electrode of the transistor 1411 decreases.
- the source electrode of the transistor 1411 is connected to the second electrode of the capacitor 1415 ; the gate electrode of the transistor 1411 is connected to the first electrode of the capacitor 1415 ; and the gate electrode side is in a floating state. Therefore, in accordance with the decrease in the source potential, the gate potential of the transistor 1411 also decreases by the same amount as the decrease in the source potential.
- Vgs of the transistor 1411 does not change. Therefore, the current flowing to the transistor 1411 and the light emitting element 1416 is not affected even if the light emitting element is deteriorated. Note that it is found also in Formula (8) that the current I flowing to the light emitting element does not depend on the source potential and a drain potential.
- a channel length L of the transistor 1411 is preferably long to suppress an increase in current amount by avalanche breakdown and channel length modulation.
- a reverse bias voltage is applied to the light emitting element 1416 in the initialization period, a shorted portion in the light emitting element can be insulated and deterioration of the light emitting element can be suppressed. Thus, the lifetime of the light emitting element can be extended.
- the light emitting element 1416 shown in FIG. 14 is not particularly limited, and an EL element (an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element, or an EL element containing an organic material and an inorganic material), an electron emitting element, a liquid crystal element, electronic ink, or the like can be used.
- the transistor 1411 functions to control a current value supplied to the light emitting element 1416
- the kind of the transistor is not particularly limited. Therefore, a thin film transistor (TFT) using a crystalline semiconductor film, a thin film transistor using a non-single crystalline semiconductor film typified by an amorphous silicon film or a polycrystalline silicon film, a transistor formed using a semiconductor substrate or an SOI substrate, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, or a bipolar transistor, a transistor using an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube, or another transistor can be used.
- TFT thin film transistor
- the first switch 1412 selects timing to input a signal in accordance with a pixel gray scale level to the capacitor.
- the second switch 1413 selects timing to apply a predetermined potential to the gate electrode of the transistor 1411 .
- the third switch 1414 selects timing to apply a predetermined potential for initializing a potential written in the capacitor 1415 . Therefore, the first switch 1412 , the second switch 1413 , and the third switch 1414 are not particularly limited as long as they have the above functions.
- Each of the switches may be a transistor, a diode, or a logic circuit that is a combination thereof.
- a polarity (conductivity type) thereof is not particularly limited. However, it is desirable to use a transistor having a polarity with lower off-current.
- a transistor provided with an LDD region, a transistor having a multi-gate structure, or the like can be given.
- the switch may be of CMOS type using both an n-channel transistor and a p-channel transistor.
- an L-level signal is inputted to a scan line which controls on/off of each switch when the switch is desired to be turned on, or an H-level signal is inputted when the switch is desired to be turned off.
- a manufacturing process can be simplified because the pixel can be formed using only p-channel transistors.
- the pixel described in this embodiment mode can be applied to the display device of FIG. 6 .
- initialization start time can be freely set in respective rows unless data write periods in the respective rows overlap.
- a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period that is, a duty ratio
- a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided.
- a threshold write period can be set to be long, a threshold voltage of a transistor which controls a current value flowing to a light emitting element can be written into a capacitor more accurately. Therefore, reliability as a display device is improved.
- the potential supply line 1422 can also be used as a wiring of another row similarly to Embodiment Mode 3.
- any of the structures of the transistors described in Embodiment Modes 4 and 5 can be applied to the transistor 1411 .
- Embodiment Mode 6 the structure and operation described in Embodiment Mode 6 can also be applied.
- the transistor 1411 can be applied to the pixel structures described in Embodiment Modes 1 to 6.
- a rectifier element 3201 is connected so that current flows to the gate electrode of the transistor 1411 from a fourth scan line 3202 .
- an H-level signal is inputted only when forcibly turning off the transistor 1411 , and otherwise, an L-level signal is inputted. Then, current does not flow to the rectifier element 3201 when the fourth scan line 3202 is at an L level, and current flows to the fourth scan line 3202 from the transistor 1411 when at an H level.
- a potential held by the capacitor 1415 is lowered to the absolute value of the threshold voltage (
- an H-level potential needs to be determined so that the potential of the gate electrode of the transistor 1411 does not become equal to or higher than a potential which is lower than the H-level potential by a forward threshold voltage of the rectifier element 3201 . According to such operation, black display is inserted; an afterimage becomes less perceptible; and moving image characteristics can be improved.
- a transistor shown in the fragmentary sectional view in this embodiment mode is a transistor functioning to control a current value supplied to a light emitting element.
- a base film 1712 is formed over a substrate 1711 having an insulating surface.
- an insulating substrate such as a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate (polyimide, acrylic, polyethylene terephthalate, polycarbonate, polyarylate, polyethersulfone, or the like), or a ceramic substrate; or a metal substrate (tantalum, tungsten, molybdenum, or the like), a semiconductor substrate, or the like on the surface of which an insulating film is formed, can be used. Note that it is necessary to use a substrate which can withstand at least heat generated during a process.
- the base film 1712 is formed using a single layer or a plurality of layers (two or more layers) of an insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride (SiO x N y ) film. Note that the base film 1712 may be formed using a sputtering method, a CVD method, or the like. Although the base film 1712 is a single layer in this embodiment mode, it goes without saying that it may be a plurality of layers (two or more layers).
- the transistor 1713 includes at least a semiconductor layer 1714 , a gate insulating film 1715 formed over the semiconductor layer 1714 , and a gate electrode 1716 formed over the semiconductor layer 1714 with the gate insulating film 1715 interposed therebetween.
- the semiconductor layer 1714 has a source region and a drain region.
- the semiconductor layer 1714 can be formed using a film having a non-crystalline state (i.e. a non-crystalline semiconductor film) selected from an amorphous semiconductor containing silicon, silicon germanium (SiGe), or the like as well as amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) as its main component, a semi-amorphous semiconductor in which an amorphous state and a crystalline state are mixed, a microcrystalline semiconductor in which crystal grains of 0.5 nm to 20 nm can be observed within an amorphous semiconductor, or a crystalline semiconductor film of polysilicon (p-Si:H) or the like.
- a non-crystalline semiconductor film selected from an amorphous semiconductor containing silicon, silicon germanium (SiGe), or the like as well as amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) as its main component, a semi-amorphous semiconductor in which an amorphous state and a crystalline state are mixed, a microcrystalline semiconductor in which crystal grains of 0.5 nm to 20 n
- the semiconductor layer 1714 when using a non-crystalline semiconductor film, the semiconductor layer 1714 may be formed using a sputtering method, a CVD method, or the like, and when using a crystalline semiconductor film, the semiconductor layer 1714 may be formed by, for example, forming and then crystallizing a non-crystalline semiconductor film. If necessary, a slight amount of an impurity element (such as phosphorus, arsenic, or boron) may be contained in the semiconductor layer 1714 in addition to the above main component in order to control a threshold voltage of a transistor.
- an impurity element such as phosphorus, arsenic, or boron
- a gate insulating film 1715 is formed to cover the semiconductor layer 1714 .
- the gate insulating film 1715 is formed of a single layer or a plurality of stacked films using, for example, silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon nitride oxide, or the like. Note that a CVD method, a sputtering method, or the like can be used as a film formation method.
- a gate electrode 1716 is formed over the semiconductor layer 1714 with the gate insulating film 1715 interposed therebetween.
- the gate electrode 1716 may be formed of a single layer or may be formed by stacking a plurality of metal films.
- the gate electrode can be formed using a metal element selected from among tantalum (Ta), tungsten (W), titanium (Ti), molybdenum (Mo), aluminum (Al), copper (Cu), and chromium (Cr) or an alloy or compound material containing the element as its main component.
- the gate electrode may include a first conductive film and a second conductive film using tantalum nitride (TaN) as a first conductive layer and tungsten (W) as a second conductive layer.
- an impurity which imparts n-type or p-type conductivity is selectively added to the semiconductor layer 1714 using as a mask the gate electrode 1716 or a resist which is formed into a desired shape.
- a channel formation region and an impurity region are formed in the semiconductor layer 1714 .
- the transistor 1713 can be formed as either an n-channel transistor or a p-channel transistor depending on the conductivity type of an impurity element to be added.
- a silicon compound for example, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film is formed to cover the gate electrode 1716 and then etched back to form a sidewall 1717 .
- a source region 1718 , a drain region 1719 , and an LDD region 1720 can be formed by adding an impurity which imparts conductivity to the semiconductor layer 1714 . Therefore, the LDD region 1720 is located below the sidewall 1717 .
- the sidewall 1717 is provided to form the LDD region 1720 in a self-aligned manner, and does not necessarily need to be provided.
- phosphorus, arsenic, boron, or the like is used as the impurity which imparts conductivity.
- a first interlayer insulating film 1730 is formed by stacking a first insulating film 1721 and a second insulating film 1722 to cover the gate electrode 1716 .
- an inorganic insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride (SiO x N y ) film or an organic resin film (a photosensitive or non-photosensitive organic resin film) with a low dielectric constant can be used.
- a film containing siloxane may be used.
- siloxane is a material in which a skeleton is formed by the bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O), and an organic group (such as an alkyl group or aromatic hydrocarbon) is used as a substituent. Further, a fluoro group may be contained as a substituent.
- the first interlayer insulating film 1730 has a stacked structure of two layers; however, it may be a single layer or have a stacked structure of three or more layers.
- first insulating film 1721 and the second insulating film 1722 may be formed using a sputtering method, a CVD method, a spin coating method, or the like, and may be formed by a coating method in the case of using an organic resin film or a film containing siloxane.
- source and drain electrodes 1723 are formed over the first interlayer insulating film 1730 . Note that the source and drain electrodes 1723 are connected to the source region 1718 and the drain region 1719 through contact holes, respectively.
- the source and drain electrodes 1723 can be formed using a metal such as silver (Ag), gold (Au), copper (Cu), nickel (Ni), platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd), iridium (Ir), rhodium (Rh), tungsten (W), aluminum (Al), tantalum (Ta), molybdenum (Mo), cadmium (Cd), zinc (Zn), iron (Fe), titanium (Ti), silicon (Si), germanium (Ge), zirconium (Zr), or barium (Ba), an alloy thereof, metal nitride thereof, or stacked films thereof.
- a metal such as silver (Ag), gold (Au), copper (Cu), nickel (Ni), platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd), iridium (Ir), rhodium (Rh), tungsten (W), aluminum (Al), tantalum (Ta), molybdenum (Mo), cadmium (Cd), zinc (Zn),
- a second interlayer insulating film 1731 is formed to cover the source and drain electrodes 1723 .
- an inorganic insulating film, a resin film, or a stacked layer thereof can be used.
- a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, or a stacked layer thereof can be used.
- the resin film polyimide, polyamide, acrylic, polyimide amide, epoxy, or the like can be used.
- a pixel electrode 1724 is formed over the second interlayer insulating film 1731 .
- an insulator 1725 is formed to cover an end portion of the pixel electrode 1724 .
- the insulator 1725 is formed to have a curved surface with curvature at an upper end or a lower end thereof in order to favorably form a layer 1726 containing a light emitting substance later.
- the insulator 1725 is preferably formed to have a curved surface with a curvature radius (0.2 ⁇ m to 3 ⁇ m) only at an upper end.
- Either a negative resist which becomes insoluble in an etchant by light irradiation or a positive resist which becomes soluble in an etchant by light irradiation can be used as the insulator 1725 .
- an inorganic material such as silicon oxide or silicon oxynitride as well as an organic material can be used as a material of the insulator 1725 .
- a layer 1726 containing a light emitting substance and an opposite electrode 1727 are formed over the pixel electrode 1724 and the insulator 1725 .
- a light emitting element 1728 is formed in a region where the layer 1726 containing a light emitting substance is sandwiched between the pixel electrode 1724 and the opposite electrode 1727 .
- the pixel electrode 1724 and the opposite electrode 1727 in FIG. 17 correspond to a pixel electrode 1801 and an opposite electrode 1802 in FIGS. 18A and 18B , respectively.
- the pixel electrode is an anode and the opposite electrode is a cathode.
- a hole injection layer 1811 , a hole transport layer 1812 , an electron transport layer 1814 , an electron injection layer 1815 , and the like as well as a light emitting layer 1813 are provided between the pixel electrode 1801 and the opposite electrode 1802 .
- These layers are stacked so that holes are injected from the pixel electrode 1801 side and electrons are injected from the opposite electrode 1802 side when applying a voltage to set a potential of the pixel electrode 1801 to be higher than a potential of the opposite electrode 1802 .
- the holes injected from the pixel electrode 1801 and the electrons injected from the opposite electrode 1802 are recombined in the light emitting layer 1813 to excite a light emitting substance. Then, the excited light emitting substance emits light when returning to a ground state. Note that it is acceptable as long as the light emitting substance is a substance which can provide luminescence (electroluminescence).
- the substance for forming the light emitting layer 1813 there is no particular limitation on the substance for forming the light emitting layer 1813 , and the light emitting layer may be formed of only a light emitting substance.
- the light emitting layer is preferably a layer formed using a substance (host) having a larger energy gap than that of the light emitting substance, in which the light emitting substance is mixed so as to be dispersed. This can prevent concentration quenching of the light emitting substance.
- the energy gap refers to an energy difference between the lowest unoccupied molecular orbital (LUMO) level and the highest occupied molecular orbital (HOMO) level.
- the light emitting substance there is no particular limitation on the light emitting substance, and a substance which can emit light with a desired emission wavelength may be used.
- a substance which exhibits light emission having a peak of an emission spectrum at 600 nm to 680 nm can be used, such as 4-dicyanomethylene-2-isopropyl-6-[2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyljulolidine-9-yl)ethenyl]-4H-p yran (abbr.: DCJTI), 4-dicyanomethylene-2-methyl-6-[2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyljulolidine-9-yl)ethenyl]-4H-pyr an (abbr.: DCJT), 4-dicyanomethylene-2-tert-buytyl-6-[2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyljulolidine-9-yl)ethenyl]-4H-p yran (abbr.: DCJTB), perif
- a substance which exhibits light emission having a peak of an emission spectrum at 500 nm to 550 nm can be used, such as N,N′-dimethylquinacridon (abbr.: DMQd), coumarin 6, coumarin 545T, tris(8-quinolinolato)aluminum (abbr.: Alq), or N,N′-diphenylquinacridon (DPQd).
- DMQd N,N′-dimethylquinacridon
- Alq tris(8-quinolinolato)aluminum
- DPQd N,N′-diphenylquinacridon
- a substance which exhibits light emission having a peak of an emission spectrum at 420 nm to 500 nm can be used, such as 9,10-bis(2-naphthyl)-tert-butylanthracene (abbr.: t-BuDNA), 9,9′-bianthryl, 9,10-diphenylanthracene (abbr.: DPA), 9,10-bis(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbr.: DNA), bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)-4-phenylphenolato-gallium (abbr.: BGaq), or bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)-4-phenylphenolato-aluminum (abbr.: BAlq).
- t-BuDNA 9,10-bis(2-naphthyl)-tert-butylanthracene
- DPA 9,10-diphenylanthracene
- DNA 9,10-bis(2-naphth
- anthracene derivative such as 9,10-di(2-naphthyl)-2-tert-butylanthracene (abbr.: t-BuDNA)
- a carbazole derivative such as 4,4′-bis(N-carbazolyl)biphenyl (abbr.: CBP)
- a metal complex such as bis[2-(2-hydroxphenyl)pyridinato]zinc (abbr.: Znpp 2 ) or bis[2-(2-hydroxphenyl)benzoxazolato]zinc (abbr.: ZnBOX), or the like can be used.
- an anode material for forming the pixel electrode 1801 is not particularly limited, a metal, an alloy, a conductive compound, a mixture thereof, or the like having a high work function (a work function of 4.0 eV or higher) is preferably used.
- oxide of a metal material such as indium tin oxide (abbr.: ITO), ITO containing silicon oxide, or indium zinc oxide (abbr.: IZO) formed using a target in which indium oxide is mixed with zinc oxide (ZnO) of 2 wt % to 20 wt % can be given.
- Au gold
- platinum Pt
- Ni nickel
- tungsten W
- Cr chromium
- Mo molybdenum
- Fe iron
- Co cobalt
- Cu copper
- palladium Pd
- nitride of a metal material for example, TiN
- a metal, an alloy, a conductive compound, a mixture thereof, or the like having a low work function (a work function of 3.8 eV or lower) can be used as a substance for forming the opposite electrode 1802 .
- a cathode material an element belonging to Group 1 or 2 of the Periodic Table, that is, an alkali metal such as lithium (Li) or cesium (Cs), an alkaline earth metal such as magnesium (Mg), calcium (Ca), or strontium (Sr), or an alloy containing these (Mg:Ag, Al:Li) can be given.
- various conductive materials including the materials described as the material of the pixel electrode 1801 such as Al, Ag, ITO, or ITO containing silicon oxide can be used for the opposite electrode 1802 regardless of the magnitude of the work function.
- a similar effect can be obtained by forming the electron injection layer 1815 to be described later using a material having a particularly excellent electron injecting function.
- either or both the pixel electrode 1801 and the opposite electrode 1802 are transparent electrodes made of ITO or the like or are formed with a thickness of several to several tens nm so as to be able to transmit visible light.
- the hole transport layer 1812 is provided between the pixel electrode 1801 and the light emitting layer 1813 as shown in FIG. 18A .
- the hole transport layer is a layer functioning to transport holes injected from the pixel electrode 1801 to the light emitting layer 1813 .
- the hole transport layer 1812 is preferably formed using a substance having an excellent hole transport property, and particularly, a substance having a hole mobility of 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 6 cm 2 /Vs or more.
- the substance having an excellent hole transport property refers to a substance having a higher mobility of holes than that of electrons.
- the electron transport layer 1814 may be provided between the opposite electrode 1802 and the light emitting layer 1813 as shown in FIG. 18A .
- the electron transport layer is a layer functioning to transport electrons injected from the opposite electrode 1802 to the light emitting layer 1813 .
- the electron transport layer 1814 can be formed of a metal complex having a quinoline skeleton or a benzoquinoline skeleton such as tris(8-quinolinolato)aluminum (abbr.: Alq), tris(5-methyl-8-quinolinolato)aluminum (abbr.: Almq 3 ), bis(10-hydroxybenzo[h]-quinolinolato)beryllium (abbr.: BeBq 2 ), or bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)-4-phenylphenolato-aluminum (abbr.: BAlq), or the like.
- a metal complex having a quinoline skeleton or a benzoquinoline skeleton such as tris(8-quinolinolato)aluminum (abbr.: Alq), tris(5-methyl-8-quinolinolato)aluminum (abbr.: Almq 3 ), bis(10-hydroxybenzo[h]-
- it may be formed of a metal complex having an oxazole-based or thiazole-based ligand such as bis[2-(2-hydroxyphenyl)benzoxazolato]zinc (abbr.: Zn(BOX) 2 ) or bis[2-(2-hydroxyphenyl)benzoxazolato]zinc (abbr.: Zn(BTZ) 2 ), or the like.
- an oxazole-based or thiazole-based ligand such as bis[2-(2-hydroxyphenyl)benzoxazolato]zinc (abbr.: Zn(BOX) 2 ) or bis[2-(2-hydroxyphenyl)benzoxazolato]zinc (abbr.: Zn(BTZ) 2 ), or the like.
- 2-(4-biphenylyl)-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole abbreviations: PBD
- 1,3-bis[5-(p-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl]benzene abbreviations: OXD-7
- 3-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-4-phenyl-5-(4-biphenylyl)-1,2,4-triazole abbreviations
- TAZ 3-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-4-(4-ethylphenyl)-5-(4-biphenylyl)-1,2,4-triazole
- p-EtTAZ bathophenanthroline
- BCP bathocuproin
- the electron transport layer 1814 is preferably formed using a substance having a higher mobility of electrons than that of holes as described above.
- the electron transport layer 1814 is preferably formed using a substance having an electron mobility of 10 ⁇ 6 cm 2 Vs or more.
- the electron transport layer 1814 may be a layer having a multilayer structure which is formed by combining two or more layers formed of the above-described substances.
- the hole injection layer 1811 may be provided between the pixel electrode 1801 and the hole transport layer 1812 as shown in FIG. 18A .
- the hole injection layer refers to a layer functioning to promote hole injection from an electrode functioning as an anode to the hole transport layer 1812 .
- the hole injection layer 1811 can be formed of metal oxide such as molybdenum oxide (MoO X ), vanadium oxide (VO X ), ruthenium oxide (RuO X ), tungsten oxide (WO X ), or manganese oxide (MnO X ).
- MoO X molybdenum oxide
- VO X vanadium oxide
- RuO X ruthenium oxide
- WO X tungsten oxide
- MnO X manganese oxide
- the hole injection layer 1811 can be formed of a phthalocyanine-based compound such as phthalocyanine (abbr.: H 2 Pc) or copper phthalocyanine (CuPc), an aromatic amine-based compound such as 4,4-bis ⁇ N-[4-(N,N-di-m-tolyamino)phenyl]-N-phenylamino ⁇ biphenyl (abbr.: DNTPD), a high molecular compound such as a poly(ethylene dioxythiophene)/poly(styrenesulfonic acid) aqueous solution (PEDOT/PSS), or the like.
- a phthalocyanine-based compound such as phthalocyanine (abbr.: H 2 Pc) or copper phthalocyanine (CuPc)
- an aromatic amine-based compound such as 4,4-bis ⁇ N-[4-(N,N-di-m-tolyamino)phenyl]-N-phenylamino ⁇ b
- a mixture of the metal oxide and a substance having an excellent hole transport property may be provided between the pixel electrode 1801 and the hole transport layer 1812 . Since such a layer does not cause an increase in drive voltage even when thickened, optical design using a microcavity effect or a light interference effect can be performed by adjusting the thickness of the layer. Therefore, a high-quality light emitting element with excellent color purity and few color changes depending on a viewing angle can be manufactured.
- a film thickness can be set so as to prevent short circuit of the pixel electrode 1801 and the opposite electrode 1802 due to the influence of unevenness generated at the time of film formation on the surface of the pixel electrode 1801 and minute residue remaining on the surface of the electrode.
- the electron injection layer 1815 may be provided between the opposite electrode 1802 and the electron transport layer 1814 as shown in FIG. 18A .
- the electron injection layer is a layer functioning to promote electron injection from an electrode functioning as a cathode to the electron transport layer 1814 .
- electron injection to the light emitting layer may be supported by providing the electron injection layer between the electrode functioning as a cathode and the light emitting layer.
- the electron injection layer 1815 can be formed using a compound of alkali metal or alkaline earth metal, such as lithium fluoride (LiF), cesium fluoride (CsF), or calcium fluoride (CaF 2 ).
- a compound of alkali metal or alkaline earth metal such as lithium fluoride (LiF), cesium fluoride (CsF), or calcium fluoride (CaF 2 ).
- a mixture of a substance having an excellent electron transport property such as Alq or 4,4-bis(5-methylbenzoxazol-2-yl)stilbene (BzOs) and alkali metal or alkaline earth metal such as magnesium or lithium can be used for the electron injection layer 1815 .
- each of the hole injection layer 1811 , the hole transport layer 1812 , the light emitting layer 1813 , the electron transport layer 1814 , and the electron injection layer 1815 may be formed by any method such as an evaporation method, an ink-jet method, or a coating method.
- the pixel electrode 1801 or the opposite electrode 1802 may also be formed using any method such as a sputtering method or an evaporation method.
- a layer structure of a light emitting element is not limited to that shown in FIG. 18A , and may be manufactured by forming layers sequentially from an electrode serving as a cathode as shown in FIG. 18B .
- the pixel electrode 1801 may be a cathode
- the electron injection layer 1815 , the electron transport layer 1814 , the light emitting layer 1813 , the hole transport layer 1812 , the hole injection layer 1811 , and the opposite electrode 1802 may be stacked in this order over the pixel electrode 1801 .
- the opposite electrode 1802 functions as an anode.
- the light emitting element is described to have a single light emitting layer; however, the light emitting element may include a plurality of light emitting layers.
- White light can be obtained by providing a plurality of light emitting layers and mixing light emissions from the respective light emitting layers.
- a light emitting element including two light emitting layers, a spacing layer, and a layer which generates holes and a layer which generates electrons are preferably provided between a first light emitting layer and a second light emitting layer. This structure enables the light emitted from the respective light emitting layers to outside to be visually mixed and perceived as white light. Thus, white light can be obtained.
- either or both the pixel electrode 1724 and the opposite electrode 1727 are formed of a light-transmitting substance.
- FIGS. 20A and 20B Fragmentary sectional views of pixels are shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B . Note that in each of FIGS. 20A and 20B , a transistor having a staggered structure is shown and a capacitor included in a pixel is also explained.
- a base film 2012 is formed over a substrate 2011 . Further, a pixel electrode 2013 is formed over the base film 2012 . In addition, a first electrode 2014 is formed of the same material and in the same layer as the pixel electrode 2013 .
- a wiring 2015 and a wiring 2016 are formed over the base film 2012 , and an end of the pixel electrode 2013 is covered with the wiring 2015 .
- An n-type semiconductor layer 2017 and an n-type semiconductor layer 2018 each having n-type conductivity are formed over the wiring 2015 and the wiring 2016 .
- a semiconductor layer 2019 is formed over the base film 2012 and between the wiring 2015 and the wiring 2016 . A part of the semiconductor layer 2019 is extended so as to overlap with the n-type semiconductor layer 2017 and the n-type semiconductor layer 2018 .
- this semiconductor layer is formed of a non-crystalline semiconductor film made of an amorphous semiconductor such as amorphous silicon (a-Si:H), a semi-amorphous semiconductor, a microcrystalline semiconductor, or the like.
- a gate insulating film 2020 is formed over the semiconductor layer 2019 .
- An insulating film 2021 made of the same material and in the same layer as the gate insulating film 2020 is also formed over the first electrode 2014 .
- a gate electrode 2022 is formed over the gate insulating film 2020 ; thus, a transistor 2025 is formed.
- a second electrode 2023 made of the same material and in the same layer as the gate electrode 2022 is formed over the first electrode 2014 with the insulating film 2021 interposed therebetween, and a capacitor 2024 is formed in which the insulating film 2021 is sandwiched between the first electrode 2014 and the second electrode 2023 .
- An interlayer insulating film 2026 is formed to cover the end of the pixel electrode 2013 , the transistor 2025 , and the capacitor 2024 .
- a layer 2027 containing a light emitting substance and an opposite electrode 2028 are formed over the interlayer insulating film 2026 and the pixel electrode 2013 located in an opening of the interlayer insulating film 2026 , and a light emitting element 2029 is formed in a region where the layer 2027 containing a light emitting substance is sandwiched between the pixel electrode 2013 and the opposite electrode 2028 .
- the first electrode 2014 shown in FIG. 20A may be formed of the same material and in the same layer as the wirings 2015 and 2016 as shown in FIG. 20B , and a capacitor 2031 may be formed in which the insulating film 2021 is sandwiched between the first electrode 2030 and the second electrode 2023 .
- a p-channel transistor may be used as the transistor 2025 in FIGS. 20A and 20B .
- Materials of the substrate 2011 , the base film 2012 , the pixel electrode 2013 , the gate insulating film 2020 , the gate electrode 2022 , the interlayer insulating film 2026 , the layer 2027 containing a light emitting substance, and the opposite electrode 2028 may be similar to those of the substrate 1711 , the base film 1712 , the pixel electrode 1724 , the gate insulating film 1715 , the gate electrode 1716 , the interlayer insulating films 1730 and 1731 , the layer 1726 containing a light emitting substance, and the opposite electrode 1727 shown in FIG. 17 .
- the wiring 2015 and the wiring 2016 may be formed using similar materials to those of the source and drain electrodes 1723 in FIG. 17 .
- FIGS. 21A and 21B fragmentary sectional views of pixels each having a transistor with a structure in which a gate electrode is sandwiched between a substrate and a semiconductor layer, in other words, a bottom-gate transistor in which a gate electrode is located below a semiconductor layer are shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B as other structures of a transistor using a non-crystalline semiconductor film for a semiconductor layer.
- a base film 2112 is formed over a substrate 2111 .
- a gate electrode 2113 is formed over the base film 2112 .
- a first electrode 2114 is formed of the same material and in the same layer as the gate electrode 2113 .
- a material of the gate electrode 2113 may be polycrystalline silicon to which phosphorus is added or silicide that is a compound of metal and silicon as well as the material used for the gate electrode 1716 shown in FIG. 17 .
- a gate insulating film 2115 is formed to cover the gate electrode 2113 and the first electrode 2114 .
- a semiconductor layer 2116 is formed over the gate insulating film 2115 .
- a semiconductor layer 2117 made of the same material and in the same layer as the semiconductor layer 2116 is formed over the first electrode 2114 .
- this semiconductor layer is formed of a non-crystalline semiconductor film made of an amorphous semiconductor such as amorphous silicon (a-Si:H), a semi-amorphous semiconductor, a microcrystalline semiconductor, or the like.
- n-type semiconductor layer 2118 and an n-type semiconductor layer 2119 each having n-type conductivity are formed over the semiconductor layer 2116 , and an n-type semiconductor layer 2120 is formed over the semiconductor layer 2117 .
- a wiring 2121 and a wiring 2122 are formed over the n-type semiconductor layer 2118 and the n-type semiconductor layer 2119 , respectively, and a transistor 2129 is formed.
- a conductive layer 2123 made of the same material and in the same layer as the wiring 2121 and the wiring 2122 is formed over the n-type semiconductor layer 2120 , and this conductive layer 2123 , the n-type semiconductor layer 2120 , and the semiconductor layer 2117 form a second electrode.
- a capacitor 2130 is formed in which the gate insulating film 2115 is sandwiched between this second electrode and the first electrode 2114 .
- One end of the wiring 2121 is extended, and a pixel electrode 2124 is formed on the extended portion of the wiring 2121 .
- An insulator 2125 is formed to cover an end of the pixel electrode 2124 , the transistor 2129 , and the capacitor 2130 .
- a layer 2126 containing a light emitting substance and an opposite electrode 2127 are formed over the pixel electrode 2124 and the insulator 2125 , and a light emitting element 2128 is formed in a region where the layer 2126 containing a light emitting substance is sandwiched between the pixel electrode 2124 and the opposite electrode 2127 .
- the semiconductor layer 2117 and the n-type semiconductor layer 2120 which serve as a part of the second electrode of the capacitor 2130 do not particularly need to be provided.
- a capacitor may be formed in which the conductive layer 2123 is used as the second electrode and the gate insulating film 2115 is sandwiched between the first electrode 2114 and the conductive layer 2123 .
- n-channel transistor is used as the transistor 2129
- p-channel transistor may be used.
- a capacitor 2132 having a structure in which the gate insulating film 2115 is sandwiched between the first electrode 2114 and a second electrode 2131 made of the same material and in the same layer as the pixel electrode 2124 as shown in FIG. 21B can also be formed by forming the pixel electrode 2124 before forming the wiring 2121 in FIG. 21A .
- FIGS. 22A and 22B Note that a common reference numeral is used in FIGS. 22A and 22B to denote a similar component to that in FIGS. 21A and 21B .
- a transistor 2201 with a channel protective structure shown in FIG. 22A is different from the transistor 2129 with a channel etch structure shown in FIG. 21A in that an insulator 2202 serving as an etching mask is provided over a region of the semiconductor layer 2116 in which a channel is formed.
- a transistor 2201 with a channel protective structure shown in FIG. 22B is different from the transistor 2129 with a channel etch structure shown in FIG. 21B in that an insulator 2202 serving as an etching mask is provided over a region of the semiconductor layer 2116 in which a channel is formed.
- Manufacturing cost can be reduced by using a non-cyrstalline semiconductor film for a semiconductor layer of a transistor included in the pixel of the present invention. Note that the materials explained with reference to FIG. 17 can be used as respective materials.
- Structures of a transistor and a capacitor are not limited to those described above, and transistors and capacitors having various structures can be used.
- a crystalline semiconductor film made of polysilicon (p-Si:H) or the like as well as a non-crystalline semiconductor film made of an amorphous semiconductor such as amorphous silicon (a-Si:H), a semi-amorphous semiconductor, a microcrystalline semiconductor, or the like may be used for a semiconductor layer of a transistor.
- FIG. 23 shows a fragmentary sectional view of a pixel including a transistor using a crystalline semiconductor film for a semiconductor layer, which is explained below. Note that a transistor 2318 shown in FIG. 23 is the multi-gate transistor shown in FIG. 10 .
- a base film 2302 is formed over a substrate 2301 , and a semiconductor layer 2303 is formed thereover.
- the semiconductor layer 2303 is formed by patterning a crystalline semiconductor film into a desired shape.
- an amorphous silicon film is formed over the substrate 2301 by a sputtering method, a CVD method, or the like.
- a film formation material does not need to be limited to an amorphous silicon film, and a non-crystalline semiconductor film made of an amorphous semiconductor, a semi-amorphous semiconductor, a microcrystalline semiconductor, or the like is acceptable.
- a compound semiconductor film having an amorphous structure such as an amorphous silicon germanium film may be used.
- the amorphous silicon film obtained is crystallized using a thermal crystallization method, a laser crystallization method, a thermal crystallization method using a catalytic element such as nickel, or the like, thereby obtaining a crystalline semiconductor film.
- crystallization may be performed by a combination of these crystallization methods.
- a heating furnace In the case of forming a crystalline semiconductor film by a thermal crystallization method, a heating furnace, laser irradiation, RTA (Rapid Thermal Annealing), or a combination thereof can be used.
- RTA Rapid Thermal Annealing
- a continuous wave laser beam (CW laser beam) or a pulsed laser beam
- a laser beam that can be used here, a laser beam emitted from one or more kinds of a gas laser such as an Ar laser, a Kr laser, or an excimer laser; a laser using, as a medium, single-crystal YAG, YVO 4 , forsterite (Mg 2 SiO 4 ), YAlO 3 , or GdVO 4 , or polycrystalline (ceramic) YAG, Y 2 O 3 , YVO 4 , YAlO 3 , or GdVO 4 doped with one or more of Nd, Yb, Cr, Ti, Ho, Er, Tm, and Ta as a dopant; a glass laser; a ruby laser; an alexandrite laser; a Ti:sapphire laser; a copper vapor laser; and a gold vapor laser can be used.
- a gas laser such as an Ar laser, a Kr laser, or an
- a crystal having a large grain diameter can be obtained by irradiation with the fundamental wave of the above laser beam or a second harmonic to a fourth harmonic of the laser beam.
- the second harmonic (532 nm) or the third harmonic (355 nm) of a Nd:YVO 4 laser (the fundamental wave: 1064 nm) can be used.
- an energy density of the laser is required to be about 0.01 MW/cm 2 to 100 MW/cm 2 (preferably, 0.1 MW/cm 2 to 10 MW/cm 2 ).
- a scanning rate is set to about 10 cm/sec to 2000 cm/sec for irradiation.
- a laser using, as a medium, single-crystal YAG, YVO 4 , forsterite (Mg 2 SiO 4 ), YAlO 3 , or GdVO 4 , or polycrystalline (ceramic) YAG, Y 2 O 3 , YVO 4 , YAIO 3 , GdVO 4 doped with one or more of Nd, Yb, Cr, Ti, Ho, Er, Tm, and Ta as a dopant; an Ar ion laser; or a Ti: sapphire laser can be a CW laser. Alternatively, it can be pulsed at a repetition rate of 10 MHz or more by performing Q-switch operation, mode locking, or the like.
- the semiconductor film is irradiated with the following pulsed laser after being melted by a preceding laser and before being solidified. Therefore, unlike the case of using a pulsed laser having a low repetition rate, the interface between the solid phase and the liquid phase can be moved continuously in the semiconductor film, so that crystal grains grown continuously in the scanning direction can be obtained.
- a crystallized region is formed in a part of the amorphous semiconductor film.
- This partly crystallized crystalline semiconductor film is patterned into a desired shape, thereby forming an island-shaped semiconductor film.
- This semiconductor film is used for the semiconductor layer 2303 of the transistor.
- the crystalline semiconductor layer is used for a channel formation region 2304 and an impurity region 2305 serving as a source region or a drain region of the transistor 2318 and also for a semiconductor layer 2306 and an impurity region 2308 serving as a lower electrode of a capacitor 2319 .
- the impurity region 2308 does not particularly need to be provided.
- Channel doping may be performed to the channel formation region 2304 and the semiconductor layer 2306 .
- a gate insulating film 2309 is formed over the semiconductor layer 2303 and the lower electrode of the capacitor 2319 . Further, a gate electrode 2310 is formed over the semiconductor layer 2303 with the gate insulating film 2309 interposed therebetween, and an upper electrode 2311 made of the same material and in the same layer as the gate electrode 2310 is formed over the semiconductor layer 2306 of the capacitor 2319 with the gate insulating film 2309 interposed therebetween. In this manner, the transistor 2318 and the capacitor 2319 are manufactured.
- an interlayer insulating film 2312 is formed to cover the transistor 2318 and the capacitor 2319 , and a wiring 2313 is formed over the interlayer insulating film 2312 so as to be in contact with the impurity region 2305 through a contact hole.
- a pixel electrode 2314 is formed in contact with the wiring 2313 and over the interlayer insulating film 2312 , and an insulator 2315 is formed to cover an end of the pixel electrode 2314 and the wiring 2313 .
- a layer 2316 containing a light emitting substance and an opposite electrode 2317 are formed over the pixel electrode 2314 , and a light emitting element 2320 is formed in a region where the layer 2316 containing a light emitting substance is sandwiched between the pixel electrode 2314 and the opposite electrode 2317 .
- FIG. 24 A fragmentary cross section of a pixel including a bottom-gate transistor using a crystalline semiconductor film made of polysilicon (p-Si:H) or the like for a semiconductor layer is shown in FIG. 24 .
- a base film 2402 is formed over a substrate 2401 , and a gate electrode 2403 is formed thereover.
- a first electrode 2404 of a capacitor 2423 is formed of the same material and in the same layer as the gate electrode 2403 .
- a gate insulating film 2405 is formed to cover the gate electrode 2403 and the first electrode 2404 .
- a semiconductor layer is formed over the gate insulating film 2405 .
- the semiconductor layer is formed by crystallizing a non-crystalline semiconductor film made of an amorphous semiconductor, a semi-amorphous semiconductor, a microcrystalline semiconductor, or the like using a thermal crystallization method, a laser crystallization method, a thermal crystallization method using a catalytic element such as nickel, or the like and patterning the crystallized semiconductor film into a desired shape.
- a channel formation region 2406 , an LDD region 2407 , and an impurity region 2408 serving as a source region or a drain region of a transistor 2422 , and a region 2409 serving as a second electrode, and impurity regions 2410 and 2411 of the capacitor 2423 are formed using the semiconductor layer.
- the impurity regions 2410 and 2411 are not necessarily required to be provided.
- an impurity may be added to the channel formation region 2406 and the region 2409 .
- the capacitor 2423 has a structure in which the gate insulating film 2405 is sandwiched between the first electrode 2404 and the second electrode including the region 2409 formed of the semiconductor layer and the like.
- a first interlayer insulating film 2412 is formed to cover the semiconductor layer, and a wiring 2413 is formed over the first interlayer insulating film 2412 so as to be in contact with the impurity region 2408 through a contact hole.
- An opening 2415 is formed in the first interlayer insulating film 2412 .
- a second interlayer insulating film 2416 is formed to cover the transistor 2422 , the capacitor 2423 , and the opening 2415 , and a pixel electrode 2417 is formed over the second interlayer insulating film 2416 so as to be connected to the wiring 2413 through a contact hole.
- an insulator 2418 is formed to cover an end of the pixel electrode 2417 .
- a layer 2419 containing a light emitting substance and an opposite electrode 2420 are formed over the pixel electrode 2417 , and a light emitting element 2421 is formed in a region where the layer 2419 containing a light emitting substance is sandwiched between the pixel electrode 2417 and the opposite electrode 2420 .
- the opening 2415 is located below the light emitting element 2421 . In other words, since the first interlayer insulating film 2412 has the opening 2415 , transmittance can be increased when light emission from the light emitting element 2421 is extracted from the substrate side.
- a structure of a transistor using a crystalline semiconductor film for a semiconductor layer is not limited to that described above, and the transistor can have various structures. Note that the same applies to a capacitor. In this embodiment mode, the materials in FIG. 17 can be appropriately used unless stated otherwise.
- the transistor described in this embodiment mode can be used as the transistor which controls a current value supplied to the light emitting element in the pixel described in any of Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 . Therefore, variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of the transistor can be suppressed by operating the pixel as described in any of Embodiment Modes 1 to 7. Accordingly, current in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to a light emitting element, and variation in luminance can be suppressed. In addition, power consumption can be reduced because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential.
- each pixel can emit light except in its address period by applying such a pixel to the display device of FIG. 6 , a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period (that is, a duty ratio) can be significantly high and can be approximately 100%. Therefore, a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided.
- a threshold write period can be set to be long, a threshold voltage of a transistor which controls a current value flowing to a light emitting element can be written into a capacitor more accurately. Therefore, reliability as a display device is improved.
- one mode of a display device of the present invention is explained with reference to FIGS. 25A and 25B .
- FIG. 25A is a top view showing a display device
- FIG. 25B is an A-A′ line cross sectional view (cross sectional view taken along a line A-A′) of FIG. 25A
- the display device includes a signal line driver circuit 2501 , a pixel portion 2502 , a first scan line driver circuit 2503 , and a second scan line driver circuit 2506 over a substrate 2510 which are indicated by dotted lines in the drawing.
- the display device also includes a sealing substrate 2504 and a sealant 2505 , and a portion of the display device surrounded by them is a space 2507 .
- a wiring 2508 is a wiring for transmitting signals to be inputted to the first scan line driver circuit 2503 , the second scan line driver circuit 2506 , and the signal line driver circuit 2501 and receives a video signal, a clock signal, a start signal, and the like through an FPC (Flexible Printed Circuit) 2509 that serves as an external input terminal.
- FPC Flexible Printed Circuit
- IC chips semiconductor chips provided with a memory circuit, a buffer circuit, and the like
- COG Chip On Glass
- PWB printed wiring board
- the display device of the present invention includes not only a main body of a display device but also a display device with an FPC or a PWB attached thereto. In addition, it also includes a display device on which an IC chip or the like is mounted.
- a cross-sectional structure is explained with reference to FIG. 25B .
- the pixel portion 2502 and its peripheral driver circuits (the first scan line driver circuit 2503 , the second scan line driver circuit 2506 , and the signal line driver circuit 2501 ) are formed over the substrate 2510 ; here, the signal line driver circuit 2501 and the pixel portion 2502 are shown.
- the signal line driver circuit 2501 includes transistors with single polarity such as n-channel transistors 2520 and 2521 . It goes without saying that a p-channel transistor may be used or a CMOS circuit may be formed using not only an n-channel transistor but also a p-channel transistor. In this embodiment mode, the display panel in which the peripheral driver circuits are formed over the same substrate as the pixel portion is described; however, the present invention is not limited to this. All or part of the peripheral driver circuits may be formed on an IC chip or the like and mounted by COG or the like.
- FIG. 25B shows a transistor 2511 which functions as a switch, a transistor 2512 which controls a current value supplied to a light emitting element, and a light emitting element 2528 .
- a first electrode of the transistor 2512 is connected to a pixel electrode 2513 of the light emitting element 2528 .
- an insulator 2514 is formed to cover an end of the pixel electrode 2513 .
- the insulator 2514 is formed using a positive photosensitive acrylic resin film.
- the insulator 2514 is formed to have a curved surface with a curvature at an upper end portion or a lower end portion thereof in order to obtain favorable coverage.
- the insulator 2514 is preferably formed to have a curved surface with a curvature radius (0.2 ⁇ m to 3 ⁇ m) only at the upper end portion. Either a negative resist which becomes insoluble in an etchant by light irradiation or a positive resist which becomes soluble in an etchant by light irradiation can be used as the insulator 2514 .
- a layer 2516 containing a light emitting substance and an opposite electrode 2517 are formed over the pixel electrode 2513 .
- the layer 2516 containing a light emitting substance is provided with at least a light emitting layer, there is no particular limitation on layers other than the light emitting layer, which can be appropriately selected.
- the sealing substrate 2504 By attaching the sealing substrate 2504 to the substrate 2510 using the sealant 2505 , a structure is obtained in which the light emitting element 2528 is provided in the space 2507 surrounded by the substrate 2510 , the sealing substrate 2504 , and the sealant 2505 . Note that there is also a case where the space 2507 is filled with the sealant 2505 other than an inert gas (such as nitrogen or argon).
- an inert gas such as nitrogen or argon
- an epoxy-based resin is preferably used as the sealant 2505 .
- the material preferably allows as little moisture and oxygen as possible to penetrate.
- a plastic substrate formed of FRP (Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastics), PVF (polyvinyl fluoride), Mylar, polyester, acrylic, or the like can be used other than a glass substrate or a quartz substrate.
- Variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed by using and operating any of the pixels described in Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 for the pixel portion 2502 , and thus a display device with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained.
- power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with the opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential.
- the signal line driver circuit 2501 , the pixel portion 2502 , the first scan line driver circuit 2503 , and the second scan line driver circuit 2506 can be formed over the same substrate as shown in FIGS. 25A and 25B .
- cost of the display device can be reduced.
- a manufacturing process can be simplified by using transistors with single polarity for the signal line driver circuit 2501 , the pixel portion 2502 , the first scan line driver circuit 2503 , and the second scan line driver circuit 2506 . Accordingly, a further cost reduction can be achieved.
- the display device of the present invention can be obtained as described above. Note that the above-described structure is one example and a structure of the display device of the present invention is not limited to this.
- the structure of the display device may be that in which a signal line driver circuit 2601 is formed on an IC chip and the IC chip is mounted on a display device by COG or the like as shown in FIG. 26A .
- 26A correspond to the substrate 2510 , the pixel portion 2502 , the first scan line driver circuit 2503 , the second scan line driver circuit 2506 , the FPC 2509 , the IC chip 2518 , the IC chip 2519 , the sealing substrate 2504 , and the sealant 2505 in FIG. 25A , respectively.
- a signal line driver circuit of which high speed operation is required is formed on an IC chip using a CMOS or the like to reduce power consumption.
- higher-speed operation and lower power consumption can be achieved by using a semiconductor chip made of a silicon wafer or the like as the IC chip.
- cost reduction can be achieved by forming the first scan line driver circuit 2603 and the second scan line driver circuit 2604 over the same substrate as the pixel portion 2602 .
- a further cost reduction can be achieved by forming the first scan line driver circuit 2603 , the second scan line driver circuit 2604 , and the pixel portion 2602 using transistors with single polarity.
- a decrease in output potential can be prevented by using boot trap circuits for the first scan line driver circuit 2603 and the second scan line driver circuit 2604 .
- the threshold voltage of each transistor varies due to deterioration. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a function to correct the variation.
- Variations in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed by using and operating any of the pixels described in Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 for the pixel portion 2602 , and thus, a display device with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained.
- power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential.
- a substrate area can be used efficiently by mounting an IC chip provided with a functional circuit (a memory or a buffer) on a connection portion of the FPC 2605 and the substrate 2600 .
- a structure may be employed in which a signal line driver circuit 2611 , a first scan line driver circuit 2613 , and a second scan line driver circuit 2614 corresponding to the signal line driver circuit 2501 , the first scan line driver circuit 2503 , and the second scan line driver circuit 2506 of FIG. 25A are formed on IC chips and the IC chips are mounted on a display device by COG or the like as shown in FIG. 26B .
- a substrate 2610 , a pixel portion 2612 , an FPC 2615 , an IC chip 2616 , an IC chip 2617 , a sealing substrate 2618 , and a sealant 2619 of FIG. 26B correspond to the substrate 2510 , the pixel portion 2502 , the FPC 2509 , the IC chip 2518 , the IC chip 2519 , the sealing substrate 2504 , and the sealant 2505 of FIG. 25A , respectively.
- Cost reduction can be achieved by using a non-crystalline semiconductor film, for example, an amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) film for the semiconductor layer of the transistor of the pixel portion 2612 . Further, a large-sized display panel can also be manufactured.
- a non-crystalline semiconductor film for example, an amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) film for the semiconductor layer of the transistor of the pixel portion 2612 .
- a large-sized display panel can also be manufactured.
- first scan line driver circuit, the second scan line driver circuit, and the signal line driver circuit are not necessarily provided in a row direction and a column direction of the pixels.
- a peripheral driver circuit 2701 formed on an IC chip as shown in FIG. 27A may have functions of the first scan line driver circuit 2613 , the second scan line driver circuit 2614 , and the signal line driver circuit 2611 shown in FIG. 26B .
- a substrate 2700 , a pixel portion 2702 , an FPC 2704 , an IC chip 2705 , an IC chip 2706 , a sealing substrate 2707 , and a sealant 2708 of FIG. 27A correspond to the substrate 2510 , the pixel portion 2502 , the FPC 2509 , the IC chip 2518 , the IC chip 2519 , the sealing substrate 2504 , and the sealant 2505 of FIG. 25A , respectively.
- FIG. 27B shows a substrate 2710 , a peripheral driver circuit 2711 , a pixel portion 2712 , an FPC 2713 , and an FPC 2714 .
- the FPC 2713 and the FPC 2714 input a signal and a power supply potential from outside to the peripheral driver circuit 2711 . Then, an output from the peripheral driver circuit 2711 is inputted to wirings in a row direction and a column direction connected to pixels included in the pixel portion 2712 .
- FIG. 28 shows an example of a fragmentary sectional view of a pixel portion.
- a base film 2802 is formed over a substrate 2800 ; a transistor 2801 which controls a current value supplied to a light emitting element is formed thereover; and a pixel electrode 2803 is formed in contact with a first electrode of the transistor 2801 .
- a layer 2804 containing a light emitting substance and an opposite electrode 2805 are formed thereover.
- a portion where the layer 2804 containing a light emitting substance is sandwiched between the pixel electrode 2803 and the opposite electrode 2805 serves as the light emitting element. Note that white light is emitted in FIG. 28 .
- a red color filter 2806 R, a green color filter 2806 G, and a blue color filter 2806 B are provided above the light emitting elements respectively to achieve full-color display.
- a black matrix (also referred to as a “BM”) 2807 is provided to separate these color filters.
- the display device of this embodiment mode can be appropriately combined with the structure described in Embodiment Mode 8 as well as those in Embodiment Modes 1 to 7.
- a structure of a display device is not limited to that described above, and the present invention can also be applied to a display device having another structure.
- the display device of the present invention can be applied to various electronic devices. Specifically, it can be applied to a display portion of an electronic device.
- electronic devices are as follows: a camera such as a video camera or a digital camera, a goggle type display, a navigation system, an audio-reproducing device (car audio, an audio component, or the like), a computer, a game machine, a portable information terminal (a mobile computer, a mobile phone, a mobile game machine, an electronic book, or the like), an image-reproducing device having a recording medium (specifically, a device for reproducing a recording medium such as a digital versatile disc (DVD) and having a display for displaying the reproduced image), and the like.
- a camera such as a video camera or a digital camera, a goggle type display, a navigation system, an audio-reproducing device (car audio, an audio component, or the like), a computer, a game machine, a portable information terminal (a mobile computer, a mobile phone, a mobile game machine
- FIG. 33A shows a display, which includes a chassis 3301 , a support 3302 , a display portion 3303 , a speaker portion 3304 , a video input terminal 3305 , and the like.
- the pixel described in any of Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for the display portion 3303 .
- variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and a display including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained.
- power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential.
- the display includes in its category all display devices used for displaying information, for example, for a personal computer, for TV broadcast reception, for advertisement display, or the like.
- the pixel of the present invention can be manufactured using transistors with single polarity, the number of steps can be reduced and manufacturing cost can be reduced. A process can be simplified and a further cost reduction can be achieved by using a non-crystalline semiconductor film, for example, an amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) film for a semiconductor layer of each transistor included in the pixel.
- a driver circuit on the periphery of a pixel portion is preferably formed on an IC chip and the IC chip is mounted on a display panel by COG (Chip On Glass) or the like.
- COG Chip On Glass
- a signal line driver circuit with high operation speed may be formed on an IC chip
- a scan line driver circuit with relatively low operation speed may be formed using a circuit including transistors with single polarity over the same substrate as a pixel portion.
- FIG. 33B shows a camera, which includes a main body 3311 , a display portion 3312 , an image receiving portion 3313 , an operation key 3314 , an external connection port 3315 , a shutter 3316 , and the like.
- the pixel described in any of Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for the display portion 3312 .
- variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed, and a camera including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained.
- power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential.
- the pixel of the present invention can be manufactured using transistors with single polarity, the number of steps can be reduced and manufacturing cost can be reduced. A process can be simplified and a further cost reduction can be achieved by using a non-crystalline semiconductor film, for example, an amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) film for a semiconductor layer of each transistor included in the pixel.
- a driver circuit on the periphery of a pixel portion is preferably formed on an IC chip and the IC chip is mounted on a display panel by COG or the like.
- a signal line driver circuit with high operation speed may be formed on an IC chip, and a scan line driver circuit with relatively low operation speed may be formed using a circuit including transistors with single polarity over the same substrate as a pixel portion.
- FIG. 33C shows a computer, which includes a main body 3321 , a chassis 3322 , a display portion 3323 , a keyboard 3324 , an external connection port 3325 , a pointing mouse 3326 , and the like.
- the pixel described in any of Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for the display portion 3323 .
- variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and a computer including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained.
- power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential.
- a cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors.
- FIG. 33D shows a mobile computer, which includes a main body 3331 , a display portion 3332 , a switch 3333 , an operation key 3334 , an infrared port 3335 , and the like.
- the pixel described in any of Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for the display portion 3332 .
- variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and a mobile computer including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained.
- power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential.
- a cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors.
- FIG. 33E shows a portable image reproducing device provided with a recording medium (specifically, a DVD player), which includes a main body 3341 , a chassis 3342 , a display portion A 3343 , a display portion B 3344 , a recording medium (DVD or the like) reading portion 3345 , an operation key 3346 , a speaker portion 3347 , and the like.
- the display portion A 3343 mainly displays image information
- the display portion B 3344 mainly displays character information. Note that the pixel described in any of Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for the display portion A 3343 and the display portion B 3344 .
- variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and an image reproducing device including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained.
- power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential.
- a cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors.
- FIG. 33F shows a goggle type display, which includes a main body 3351 , a display portion 3352 , an arm portion 3353 , and the like. Note that the pixel described in any of Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for the display portion 3352 . According to the present invention, variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and a goggle type display including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained. In addition, power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. A cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors.
- FIG. 33G shows a video camera, which includes a main body 3361 , a display portion 3362 , a chassis 3363 , an external connection port 3364 , a remote control receiving portion 3365 , an image receiving portion 3366 , a battery 3367 , an audio input portion 3368 , an operation key 3369 , an eye piece portion 3360 , and the like.
- the pixel described in any of Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for the display portion 3362 . According to the present invention, variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and a video camera including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained.
- power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential.
- a cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors.
- FIG. 33H shows a mobile phone, which includes a main body 3371 , a chassis 3372 , a display portion 3373 , an audio input portion 3374 , an audio output portion 3375 , an operation key 3376 , an external connection port 3377 , an antenna 3378 , and the like.
- the pixel described in any of Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for the display portion 3373 .
- variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and a mobile phone including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained.
- power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential.
- a cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors.
- the present invention can be applied to all electronic devices.
- a display panel 3410 is incorporated in a housing 3400 so as to be detachable.
- the shape and size of the housing 3400 can be appropriately changed in accordance with the size of the display panel 3410 .
- the housing 3400 to which the display panel 3410 is fixed is fitted in a printed circuit board 3401 and assembled as a module.
- the display panel 3410 is connected to the printed circuit board 3401 through an FPC 3411 .
- the printed circuit board 3401 is provided with a speaker 3402 , a microphone 3403 , a transmitting/receiving circuit 3404 , and a signal processing circuit 3405 including a CPU, a controller, and the like.
- a module, an input means 3406 , and a buttery 3407 are combined and stored in a chassis 3409 and a chassis 3412 .
- a pixel portion of the display panel 3410 is arranged so as to be seen from a window formed in the chassis 3412 .
- the pixel portion and a part of peripheral driver circuits may be formed using transistors over the same substrate, and another part of the peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a high operation frequency among the plurality of driver circuits) may be formed on an IC chip.
- the IC chip may be mounted on the display panel 3410 by COG (Chip On Glass).
- the IC chip may alternatively be connected to a glass substrate using TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or a printed circuit board.
- all of the peripheral driver circuits may be formed on an IC chip and the IC chip may be mounted on a display panel by COG or the like.
- the pixel described in any of Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for the pixel portion.
- variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and the display panel 3410 including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained.
- power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential.
- a cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors.
- the structure of a mobile phone described in this embodiment mode is one example, and the display device of the invention can be applied not only to the mobile phone having the above-described structure but also to mobile phones having various kinds of structures.
- an EL module obtained by combining a display panle and a circuit board is explained with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36 .
- a display panel 3501 includes a pixel portion 3503 , a scan line driver circuit 3504 , and a signal line driver circuit 3505 .
- a control circuit 3506 for example, a control circuit 3506 , a signal dividing circuit 3507 , and the like are formed.
- the display panel 3501 and the circuit board 3502 are connected to each other by a connection wiring 3508 .
- the connection wiring 3508 an FPC or the like can be used.
- the pixel portion and a part of peripheral driver circuits may be formed using transistors over the same substrate, and another part of the peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a high operation frequency among the plurality of driver circuits) may be formed on an IC chip.
- the IC chip may be mounted on the display panel 3501 by COG (Chip On Glass).
- the IC chip may alternatively be connected to a glass substrate using TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or a printed circuit board.
- all of the peripheral driver circuits may be formed on an IC chip and the IC chip may be mounted on a display panel by COG or the like.
- the pixel described in any of Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for the pixel portion.
- variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and the display panel 3501 with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained.
- power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential.
- a cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors.
- FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing the main structure of an EL TV receiver.
- a tuner 3601 receives a video signal and an audio signal.
- the video signal is processed by a video signal amplifier circuit 3602 , a video signal processing circuit 3603 for converting a signal outputted from the video signal amplifier circuit 3602 into a color signal corresponding to each color of red, green and blue, and a control circuit 3506 for converting the video signal into a signal which meets the input specification of a driver circuit.
- the control circuit 3506 outputs respective signals to a scan line side and a signal line side. In the case of performing a digital drive, it is possible to adopt a structure in which the signal dividing circuit 3507 is provided on the signal line side to supply an input digital signal divided into m pieces.
- the audio signal among the signals received by the tuner 3601 is transmitted to an audio signal amplifier circuit 3604 , the output of which is supplied to a speaker 3606 through an audio signal processing circuit 3605 .
- a control circuit 3607 receives control information of a receiving station (reception frequency) or sound volume from an input portion 3608 and transmits signals to the tuner 3601 and the audio signal processing circuit 3605 .
- a TV receiver By incorporating the EL module in FIG. 35 into the chassis 3301 of FIG. 33A described in Embodiment Mode 10, a TV receiver can be completed.
- the present invention is not limited to the TV receiver, and can be applied to various uses particularly as a large-sized display medium such as an information display board at a train station, an airport, or the like, or an advertisement display board on the street, as well as a monitor of a personal computer.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
- Ceramic Engineering (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
- Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)
- Control Of Indicators Other Than Cathode Ray Tubes (AREA)
- Control Of El Displays (AREA)
- Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)
- Thin Film Transistor (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- 1. Field of the Invention
- The present invention relates to a semiconductor device functioning to control a current supplied to a load by a transistor, and a display device including a pixel formed using a current-drive display element of which luminance changes in accordance with a signal, and a signal line driver circuit and a scan line driver circuit which drive the pixel. The present invention also relates to a driving method thereof. Further, the present invention relates to an electronic device having the display device in a display portion.
- 2. Description of the Related Art
- In recent years, a self-luminous display device using a light emitting element such as an electroluminescent (EL) element in a pixel, a so-called light emitting device has attracted attention. As a light emitting element used for such a self-luminous display device, an organic light emitting diode (OLED) and an EL element have attracted attention, and have been used for an EL display or the like. Since these light emitting elements emit light by themselves, they have advantages such as higher pixel visibility, no backlight required, and higher response speed, over a liquid crystal display. Note that the luminance of many of light emitting elements is controlled by the value of current flowing to the light emitting element.
- In addition, development of an active matrix display device in which each pixel is provided with a transistor that controls light emission of a light emitting element has been advanced. The active matrix display device is expected to be put into practical use because not only can it achieve high-definition and large-screen display that is difficult for a passive matrix display device, but also it operates with less power consumption than a passive matrix display device.
- A structure of a pixel of a conventional active matrix display device is shown in
FIG. 46 (Reference 1: Japanese Published Patent Application No. H8-234683). The pixel shown inFIG. 46 includes thin film transistors (TFTs) 11 and 12, acapacitor 13, and alight emitting element 14, and is connected to asignal line 15 and ascan line 16. Note that either a source electrode or a drain electrode of theTFT 12 and one electrode of thecapacitor 13 are supplied with a power supply potential Vdd, and an opposite electrode of thelight emitting element 14 is supplied with a ground potential. - At this time, when using amorphous silicon for a semiconductor layer of the
TFT 12 which controls a current value supplied to the light emitting element, that is, a drive TFT, a change in threshold voltage (Vth) is caused by deterioration or the like. In this case, although the same potential is applied to different pixels through thesignal line 15, current flowing to thelight emitting element 14 differs from pixel to pixel and display luminance becomes nonuniform among pixels. Note that also in the case of using polysilicon for a semiconductor layer of a drive TFT, characteristics of the transistor are deteriorated or varied likewise. - An operating method using a pixel of
FIG. 47 is proposed inReference 2 to improve the above problem (Reference 2: Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2004-295131). The pixel shown inFIG. 47 includes atransistor 21, adrive transistor 22 which controls a current value supplied to alight emitting element 24, acapacitor 23, and thelight emitting element 24, and the pixel is connected to asignal line 25 and ascan line 26. Note that thedrive transistor 22 is an NMOS transistor; either a source electrode or a drain electrode of thedrive transistor 22 is supplied with a ground potential; and an opposite electrode of thelight emitting element 24 is supplied with Vca. - A timing chart showing the operation of this pixel is shown in
FIG. 48 . InFIG. 48 , one frame period is divided into aninitialization period 31, a threshold (Vth) writeperiod 32, adata write period 33, and alight emitting period 34. Note that the one frame period corresponds to a period for displaying an image for one screen, and the initialization period, the threshold (Vth) write period, and the data write period are collectively referred to as an address period. - First, in the
threshold write period 32, a threshold voltage of thedrive transistor 22 is written into the capacitor. After that, in the data writeperiod 33, a data voltage (Vdata) showing a luminance of the pixel is written into the capacitor, and thus Vdata+Vth is accumulated in the capacitor. Then, in thelight emitting period 34, thedrive transistor 22 is turned on, so that thelight emitting element 24 emits light at a luminance specified by the data voltage by changing Vca. Such operation reduces a variation in luminance due to fluctuation in threshold voltage of a drive transistor. - Reference 3 also discloses that a voltage corresponding to the sum of a data potential and a threshold voltage of a drive TFT is a gate-source voltage and current flowing to the TFT does not change even when the threshold voltage of the TFT is changed (Reference 3: Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2004-280059).
- In either of the operating methods described in
References 2 and 3, the initialization, the writing of a threshold voltage, and the light emission described above are performed by changing a potential Vca several times in each one frame period. In these pixels, one electrode of a light emitting element to which Vca is supplied, that is, an opposite electrode is formed entirely over a pixel region. Therefore, the light emitting element cannot emit light if there is even a single pixel which performs data writing operation besides initialization and writing of a threshold voltage. Thus, a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period (i.e. a duty ratio) is lowered as shown inFIG. 49 . - A low duty ratio requires a high current value supplied to the light emitting element or a drive transistor, which results in increases of a voltage applied to the light emitting element and power consumption. In addition, the light emitting element or the drive transistor becomes easily deteriorated; therefore, much more power is required to obtain a luminance equivalent to that before deterioration.
- Further, since the opposite electrode is connected to all pixels, the light emitting element functions as an element with large capacitance. Therefore, more power needs to be consumed to change the potential of the opposite electrode.
- In view of the above problems, it is an object of the present invention to provide a display device which consumes less power and has a high duty ratio. It is another object of the present invention to obtain a pixel structure, a semiconductor device, and a display device with little deviation of luminance from that specified by a data potential.
- Note that the scope of the present invention is not limited only to a display device having a light emitting element, and it is an object of the present invention to suppress variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of a transistor. Therefore, a destination supplied with current controlled by a drive transistor is not limited to the light emitting element.
- One aspect of the present invention provides a semiconductor device having a pixel including a transistor, a first switch, and a second switch, in which one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a gate electrode of the transistor through the first switch, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a pixel electrode, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the second switch, and a signal in accordance with a gray scale level of the pixel is inputted to the gate electrode of the transistor.
- One aspect of the present invention provides a semiconductor device including a storage capacitor, a transistor, a first switch, a second switch, and a third switch, in which one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a first wiring, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a pixel electrode, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a second wiring through the third switch, a gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a third wiring through the first switch, the gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the first wiring through the second switch, and the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the gate electrode through the storage capacitor.
- One aspect of the present invention provides a semiconductor device including a capacitor, a transistor, a first switch, a second switch, and a third switch, in which one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a first wiring, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a pixel electrode, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a second wiring through the third switch, a gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a third wiring through the first switch, the gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the first wiring through the second switch, and the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the gate electrode through the capacitor.
- One aspect of the present invention provides a semiconductor device including a transistor, a capacitor, a first switch, a second switch, a third switch, and a fourth switch, in which one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a first wiring through the fourth switch, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a pixel electrode, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a second wiring through the third switch, a gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a third wiring through the first switch, the gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the first wiring through the second switch, and the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the gate electrode through the capacitor.
- One aspect of the present invention provides a semiconductor device including a transistor, a capacitor, a first switch, a second switch, a third switch, and a fourth switch, in which one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a first wiring, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a pixel electrode through the fourth switch, the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a second wiring through the fourth switch and the third switch, a gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to a third wiring through the first switch, the gate electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the first wiring through the second switch, and the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor is electrically connected to the gate electrode through the fourth switch and the capacitor.
- The second wiring may be the same as a wiring which controls the third switch.
- The second wiring may be any of scan lines which control first to third switches of a preceding row or a subsequent row.
- The transistor may be an n-channel transistor. Further, a semiconductor layer of the transistor may be formed of a non-crystalline semiconductor film. Furthermore, the semiconductor layer of the transistor may be formed of amorphous silicon.
- The semiconductor layer of the transistor may be formed of a crystalline semiconductor film.
- In the above invention, a potential inputted to the first wiring may have two values V1 and V2, the potential may be V2 when the first to third switches are in an off state, V1 may be a potential higher than a potential inputted to the second wiring, the difference between V1 and V2 may be larger than a threshold voltage of the transistor, and V2 may be higher than V1.
- In addition, the transistor may be a p-channel transistor. In that case, in the above invention, a potential inputted to the first wiring may have two values V1 and V2, the potential may be V2 when the first to third switches are in an off state, V1 may be a potential lower than a potential inputted to the second wiring, the difference between V1 and V2 may be larger than an absolute value of a threshold voltage of the transistor, and V2 may be lower than V1.
- One aspect of the present invention provides a semiconductor device including a transistor of which one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode is electrically connected to a first wiring and the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode is electrically connected to a second wiring, a storage capacitor which holds a gate-source voltage of the transistor, a means to hold a first voltage in the storage capacitor by applying a first potential which is inputted to the first wiring to a gate electrode of the transistor and applying a second potential which is inputted to the second wiring to the source electrode of the transistor, a means to discharge a voltage of the storage capacitor down to a second voltage, a means to hold a fifth voltage that is the sum of the second voltage and a fourth voltage in the storage capacitor by applying a potential that is the sum of the first potential and a third voltage to the gate electrode of the transistor, and a means to supply current set for the transistor to a load by inputting a third potential that is different from the first potential to the first wiring.
- One aspect of the present invention provides a semiconductor device including a transistor in which one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode is electrically connected to a first wiring and the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode is electrically connected to a second wiring, a storage capacitor which holds a gate-source voltage of the transistor, a means to hold a first voltage in the storage capacitor by applying a first potential which is inputted to the first wiring to a gate electrode of the transistor and applying a second potential inputted to the second wiring to the source electrode of the transistor, a means to discharge a voltage of the storage capacitor down to a threshold voltage of the transistor, a means to hold a fourth voltage that is the sum of the threshold voltage of the transistor and a third voltage by applying a potential that is the sum of the first potential and a second voltage to the gate electrode of the transistor, and a means to supply current set for the transistor to a load by inputting a third potential that is different from the first potential to the first wiring.
- The transistor may be an n-channel transistor. Further, a semiconductor layer of the transistor may be formed of a non-crystalline semiconductor film. Furthermore, the semiconductor layer of the transistor may be formed of amorphous silicon.
- Alternatively, the semiconductor layer of the transistor may be formed of a crystalline semiconductor film.
- In the above invention, the first potential may be a potential higher than the second potential, the difference between the first potential and the second potential may be larger than a threshold voltage of the transistor, and the first potential may be lower than the third potential.
- Furthermore, the transistor may be a p-channel transistor. In this case, in the present invention, the first potential may be a potential lower than the second potential, the difference between the first potential and the second potential may be larger than the absolute value of the threshold voltage of the transistor, and the first potential may be higher than the third potential.
- One aspect of the present invention provides a display device including the above-described semiconductor device. In addition, it also provides an electronic device having the display device in a display portion.
- Note that the switch described in this specification is not particularly limited and may be an electrical switch or a mechanical switch as long as it can control current flow. The switch may be a transistor, a diode, or a logic circuit that is a combination thereof. In the case of using a transistor as the switch, the transistor operates as a mere switch. Therefore, the polarity (conductivity type) of the transistor is not particularly limited. However, it is desirable to use a transistor having a polarity with lower off-current. As the transistor with low off-current, a transistor provided with an LDD region, a transistor having a multi-gate structure, or the like can be used. In addition, it is desirable to use an n-channel transistor when a transistor to be operated as a switch operates in a state where the potential of a source electrode thereof is close to a lower potential side power source (such as Vss, GND, or 0 V), whereas it is desirable to use a p-channel transistor when the transistor operates in a state where the potential of a source electrode thereof is close to a higher potential side power source (such as Vdd). This is because the absolute value of a gate-source voltage can be increased, so that the transistor easily operates as a switch. Note that the switch may be of CMOS type using both an n-channel transistor and a p-channel transistor.
- Note that the phrase “being connected” in the present invention is synonymous with being electrically connected. Thus, another element, switch, or the like may be interposed.
- Note that the load may be anything. For example, a display medium of which contrast varies by an electromagnetic action, such as a liquid crystal element or electronic ink can be used as well as a light emitting element such as an EL element (an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element, or an EL element containing an organic material and an inorganic material) or an electron emitting element. Note that a field emission display (FED), an SED flat-panel display (SED: Surface-conduction Electron-emitter Display), or the like can be given as an example of a display device using an electron emitting element. In addition, electronic paper can be given as a display device using electronic ink.
- In the present invention, there is no limitation on the kind of applicable transistors, and a thin film transistor (TFT) using a non-single crystal semiconductor film typified by an amorphous silicon film or a polycrystalline silicon film, a transistor formed using a semiconductor substrate or an SOI substrate, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, or a bipolar transistor, a transistor using an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube, or another transistor can be used. In addition, there is no limitation on the kind of substrate where the transistor is located, and the transistor can be located over a single crystalline substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a plastic substrate, or the like.
- Note that as described above, the transistor in the present invention may be of any type and may be formed over any type of substrate. Accordingly, all circuits may be formed over a glass substrate, a plastic substrate, a single crystalline substrate, an SOI substrate, or any other substrates. Alternatively, a part of the circuits may be formed over a substrate, and another part of the circuits may be formed over another substrate. In other words, all of the circuits are not necessarily formed over the same substrate. For example, a part of the circuits may be formed over a glass substrate using TFTs, another part of the circuits may be formed as an IC chip over a single crystalline substrate, and the IC chip may be connected onto the glass substrate by COG (Chip On Glass). Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to the glass substrate by TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or using a printed circuit board.
- In this specification, one pixel means a color element. Accordingly, in the case of a full-color display device including R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color elements, one pixel means any one of R, G, and B color elements.
- Note that the phrase “pixels are arranged in matrix” in this specification includes the case where when full-color display is performed with three color elements (e.g. RGB), pixels of three color elements constituting the smallest unit of an image are arranged in a so-called delta pattern as well as the case where pixels are arranged in a grid pattern formed by a combination of vertical stripes and horizontal stripes. In addition, the sizes of the pixels may be different from color element to color element.
- Note that the term “semiconductor device” in this specification means a device including a circuit including a semiconductor element (such as a transistor or a diode). In addition, the term “display device” includes not only a main body of a display panel in which a plurality of pixels including a load and a peripheral driver circuit for driving the pixels are formed over a substrate but also a display panel with a flexible printed circuit (FPC) or a printed wiring board (PWB) attached thereto.
- According to the present invention, variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of a transistor can be suppressed. Therefore, a desired current can be supplied to a load such as a light emitting element. In particular, when a light emitting element is used as a load, a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided.
-
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described inEmbodiment Mode 1. -
FIG. 2 is a timing chart for explaining operation of the pixel shown inFIG. 1 . -
FIGS. 3A to 3D are diagrams illustrating operation of the pixel shown inFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described inEmbodiment Mode 1. -
FIG. 5 is a model diagram of a voltage-current characteristic in accordance with channel length modulation. -
FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display device described inEmbodiment Mode 1. -
FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 3. -
FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 3. -
FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 3. -
FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 4. -
FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 4. -
FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described inEmbodiment Mode 5. -
FIG. 13 is a timing chart for explaining operation of the pixel shown inFIG. 12 . -
FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 7. -
FIG. 15 is a timing chart for explaining operation of the pixel shown inFIG. 14 . -
FIGS. 16A to 16 D are diagrams illustrating operation of the pixel shown in FIG. 14. -
FIG. 17 is a fragmentary sectional view of a pixel described in Embodiment Mode 8. -
FIGS. 18A and 18B are diagrams illustrating light emitting elements described in Embodiment Mode 8. -
FIGS. 19A to 19C are diagrams illustrating extraction directions of light described in Embodiment Mode 8. -
FIGS. 20A and 20B are fragmentary sectional views of pixels described in Embodiment Mode 8. -
FIGS. 21A and 21B are fragmentary sectional views of pixels described in Embodiment Mode 8. -
FIGS. 22A and 22B are fragmentary sectional views of pixels described in Embodiment Mode 8. -
FIG. 23 is a fragmentary sectional view of a pixel described in Embodiment Mode 8. -
FIG. 24 is a fragmentary sectional view of a pixel described in Embodiment Mode 8. -
FIGS. 25A and 25B are diagrams illustrating a display device described in Embodiment Mode 9. -
FIGS. 26A and 26B are diagrams illustrating display devices described in Embodiment Mode 9. -
FIGS. 27A and 27B are diagrams illustrating display devices described in Embodiment Mode 9. -
FIG. 28 is a fragmentary sectional view of a pixel described in Embodiment Mode 9. -
FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 6. -
FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 6. -
FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 6. -
FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 7. -
FIGS. 33A to 33 H are diagrams illustrating electronic devices to which the present invention can be applied. -
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a cellular phone. -
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of an EL module. -
FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing main components of an EL television receiver. -
FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 6. -
FIG. 38 is a top view of the pixel shown inFIG. 4 . -
FIGS. 39A and 39B are diagrams illustrating a pixel structure described inEmbodiment Mode 2. -
FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating write operation of a display device described inEmbodiment Mode 1. -
FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described inEmbodiment Mode 5. -
FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating a driving method which combines a digital gray scale method and a time gray scale method. -
FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 6. -
FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described in Embodiment Mode 6. -
FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure described inEmbodiment Mode 1. -
FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure of conventional art. -
FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a pixel structure of conventional art. -
FIG. 48 is a timing chart for operating a pixel described in Related Art. -
FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period when using conventional art. - Hereinafter, modes of the present invention are explained. Note that it is easily understood by a person skilled in the art that the present invention can be embodied in many different modes and the modes and detail of the present invention can be variously changed without deviating from the spirit and the scope of the present invention. Therefore, the present invention is not interpreted as being limited to the description of the mode. Note that the same reference numeral is used to denote the same component among the different drawings in the structure of the present invention to be described below.
- A basic structure of a pixel of the present invention is explained with reference to
FIG. 1 . The pixel shown inFIG. 1 includes atransistor 111, afirst switch 112, asecond switch 113, athird switch 114, acapacitor 115, and alight emitting element 116. Note that the pixel is connected to asignal line 117, afirst scan line 118, asecond scan line 119, athird scan line 120, apower supply line 121, and apotential supply line 122. In this embodiment mode, thetransistor 111 is an n-channel transistor and is turned on when a gate-source voltage (Vgs) thereof exceeds a threshold voltage (Vth). In addition, a pixel electrode of thelight emitting element 116 is an anode and anopposite electrode 123 is a cathode. Note that the gate-source voltage of the transistor is referred to as Vgs; a drain-source voltage, Vds; a threshold voltage, Vth; a voltage accumulated in the capacitor, Vcs; and thepower supply line 121, thepotential supply line 122, and thesignal line 117 are also referred to as a first wiring, a second wiring, and a third wiring, respectively. - A first electrode (one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode) of the
transistor 111 is connected to the pixel electrode of thelight emitting element 116; a second electrode (the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode) thereof is connected to thepower supply line 121; and a gate electrode thereof is connected to thepower supply line 121 through thesecond switch 113. In addition, the gate electrode of thetransistor 111 is also connected to thesignal line 117 through thefirst switch 112, and the first electrode thereof is also connected to thepotential supply line 122 through thethird switch 114. - Further, the
capacitor 115 is connected between the gate electrode and the first electrode of thetransistor 111. In other words, a first electrode of thecapacitor 115 is connected to the gate electrode of thetransistor 111, and a second electrode of thecapacitor 115 is connected to the first electrode of thetransistor 111. Thecapacitor 115 may be formed by sandwiching an insulating film between a wiring, a semiconductor layer, and an electrode or can be omitted by using a gate capacitance of thetransistor 111. Such a means to hold a voltage is referred to as a storage capacitor. - Note that the
first switch 112, thesecond switch 113, and thethird switch 114 are controlled to be turned on and off by inputting signals to thefirst scan line 118, thesecond scan line 119, and thethird scan line 120, respectively. - A signal in accordance with a gray scale level of the pixel which corresponds to a video signal, that is, a potential in accordance with luminance data is inputted to the
signal line 117. - Next, operation of the pixel shown in
FIG. 1 is explained with reference to a timing chart inFIG. 2 andFIGS. 3A to 3D. Note that one frame period corresponding to a period for displaying an image for one screen is divided into an initialization period, a threshold write period, a data write period, and a light emitting period inFIG. 2 . The initialization period, the threshold write period, and the data write period are collectively referred to as an address period. The length of one frame period is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1/60 second or less so that an image viewer does not perceive flicker. - Note that a potential V1 is inputted to the
opposite electrode 123 of thelight emitting element 116 and a potential V1−Vth−α (α: an arbitrary positive number) is inputted to thepotential supply line 122. In addition, to thepower supply line 121, the potential V1 is inputted in the address period and a potential V2 is inputted in the light emitting period. Note that V2>V1. - Here, the potential of the
opposite electrode 123 of thelight emitting element 116 is equal to the potential of thepower supply line 121 in the address period for the purpose of explaining operation. However, when the minimum potential difference which is necessary for thelight emitting element 116 to emit light is referred to as VEL, it is acceptable as long as the potential of theopposite electrode 123 is higher than a potential V1−Vth−α−VEL. In addition, it is acceptable as long as the potential V2 of thepower supply line 121 in the light emitting period is higher than the sum of the potential of theopposite electrode 123 and the minimum potential difference (VEL) which is necessary for thelight emitting element 116 to emit light. However, since the potential of theopposite electrode 123 is V1 here for the purpose of explanation, it is acceptable as long as V2 is higher than V1+VEL. - First, the
first switch 112 is turned off and thesecond switch 113 and thethird switch 114 are turned on in the initialization period as shown in (A) inFIG. 2 andFIG. 3A . At this time, the first electrode of thetransistor 111 serves as a source electrode, and a potential thereof is equal to that of thepotential supply line 122, which is V1−Vth−α. On the other hand, a potential of the gate electrode of thetransistor 111 is V1. Thus, the gate-source voltage Vgs of thetransistor 111 is Vth+α and thus thetransistor 111 is turned on. Then, Vth+α is held by thecapacitor 115 provided between the gate electrode and the first electrode of thetransistor 111. In other words, it is acceptable as long as thepotential supply line 122 has such a potential as to turn on thetransistor 111 and thethird switch 114 functions to select whether or not to supply such a potential as to turn on thetransistor 111 to the first electrode. - Next, the
third switch 114 is turned off in the threshold write period shown in (B) inFIG. 2 andFIG. 3B . Therefore, the potential of the first electrode, i.e. the source electrode of thetransistor 111 rises gradually and when it reaches V1−Vth, in other words, when the gate-source voltage Vgs of thetransistor 111 reaches the threshold voltage (Vth), thetransistor 111 is turned off. Thus, a voltage held by thecapacitor 115 is Vth. - In the subsequent data write period shown in (C) in
FIG. 2 andFIG. 3C , thefirst switch 112 is turned on and a potential (V1+Vdata) in accordance with luminance data is inputted from thesignal line 117 after turning off thesecond switch 113. At this time, the voltage Vcs held by thecapacitor 115 can be represented by Formula (1) where capacitances of thecapacitor 115 and thelight emitting element 116 are referred to as C1 and C2, respectively. - Note that C2>>C1 because the
light emitting element 116 is thinner and has a larger electrode area than thecapacitor 115. Thus, from C2/(C1+C2)≈1, the voltage Vcs held by thecapacitor 115 is represented by Formula (2), and thetransistor 111 is turned on. Note that when a potential Vdata≦0 is inputted, thetransistor 111 can be turned off so that thelight emitting element 116 does not emit light.
Vcs=Vth+Vdata (2) - Next, in the light emitting period shown in (D) in
FIG. 2 andFIG. 3D , thefirst switch 112 is turned off and the potential of thepower supply line 121 is set to V2. At this time, the gate-source voltage Vgs of thetransistor 111 is equal to Vth+Vdata, and current in accordance with this Vgs flows to thetransistor 111 and thelight emitting element 116, so that thelight emitting element 116 emits light. - Note that a current I flowing to the light emitting element is represented by Formula (3) when the
transistor 111 is operated in the saturation region. - A current I flowing to the light emitting element when the
transistor 111 is operated in the linear region is represented by Formula (4). - Here, W denotes a channel width of the
transistor 111 ; L, a channel length; μ, a mobility; and Cox, a storage capacitance. - According to Formulas (3) and (4), the current flowing to the
light emitting element 116 does not depend on the threshold voltage (Vth) of thetransistor 111 regardless of whether the operation region of thetransistor 111 is either the saturation region or the linear region. Therefore, variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of thetransistor 111 can be suppressed and a current value in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to thelight emitting element 116. - Accordingly, variation in luminance caused by variation in the threshold voltage of the
transistor 111 can be suppressed. In addition, power consumption can be reduced because operation is performed with the opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. - Furthermore, when the
transistor 111 is operated in the saturation region, variation in luminance due to deterioration of thelight emitting element 116 can also be suppressed. When thelight emitting element 116 is deteriorated, VEL of thelight emitting element 116 increases and the potential of the first electrode, that is, the source electrode of thetransistor 111 rises. At this time, the source electrode of thetransistor 111 is connected to the second electrode of thecapacitor 115; the gate electrode of thetransistor 111 is connected to the first electrode of thecapacitor 115; and the gate electrode side is in a floating state. Therefore, in accordance with the rise in the source potential, the gate potential of thetransistor 111 also increases by the same amount as the rise in the source potential. Thus, Vgs of thetransistor 111 does not change. Therefore, the current flowing to thetransistor 111 and thelight emitting element 116 is not affected even if the light emitting element is deteriorated. Note that it is found also in Formula (3) that the current I flowing to the light emitting element does not depend on the source potential and a drain potential. - Therefore, when the
transistor 111 is operated in the saturation region, variation in the threshold voltage of thetransistor 111 and variation in the current flowing to thetransistor 111 caused by deterioration of thelight emitting element 116 can be suppressed. - Note that in the case where the
transistor 111 is operated in the saturation region, as the channel length L is shorter, a larger amount of current tends to flow when the drain voltage is significantly increased by avalanche breakdown. - When the drain voltage is increased to exceed a pinch off voltage, a pinch off point moves to the source side and an effective channel length which substantially functions as a channel is reduced. This increases a current value. This phenomenon is referred to as channel length modulation. Note that the pinch off point is a boundary portion at which the channel disappears and the thickness of the channel is 0 below the gate, and the pinch off voltage refers to a voltage when the pinch off point is at a drain edge. This phenomenon also occurs more easily as the channel length L is shorter. For example, a model diagram of a voltage-current characteristic in accordance with channel length modulation is shown in
FIG. 5 . Note that the channel lengths L of the transistors (a), (b), (c) satisfy (a)>(b)>(c) inFIG. 5 . - Accordingly, in the case of operating the
transistor 111 in the saturation region, considering that an influence of deterioration of thelight emitting element 116 can be reduced as described above if the current I is constant with respect to the drain-source voltage Vds, the current I with respect to the drain-source voltage Vds is preferably as constant as possible. Thus, the channel length L of thetransistor 111 is preferably longer. For example, the channel length L of the transistor is preferably larger than the channel width W. In addition, the channel length L is preferably 10 μm to 50 μm inclusive and more preferably 15 μm to 40 μm inclusive. However, the channel length L and the channel width W are not limited thereto. - In addition, since a reverse bias voltage is applied to the
light emitting element 116 in the initialization period, a shorted portion in the light emitting element can be insulated and deterioration of the light emitting element can be suppressed. Thus, the lifetime of the light emitting element can be extended. - Note that since the variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of the transistor can be suppressed, supply destination of the current controlled by the transistor is not particularly limited. Therefore, an EL element (an organic EL elements an inorganic EL element, or an EL element containing an organic material and an inorganic material), an electron emitting element, a liquid crystal element, electronic ink, or the like can be used as the
light emitting element 116 shown inFIG. 1 . - In addition, it is acceptable as long as the
transistor 111 functions to control a current value supplied to thelight emitting element 116, and the kind of the transistor is not particularly limited. Therefore, a thin film transistor (TFT) using a crystalline semiconductor film, a thin film transistor using a non-single crystalline semiconductor film typified by an amorphous silicon film or a polycrystalline silicon film, a transistor formed using a semiconductor substrate or an SOI substrate, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, a bipolar transistor, a transistor using an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube, or another transistor can be used. - The
first switch 112 selects timing to input a signal in accordance with a gray scale level of the pixel to the capacitor and controls a signal supplied to the gate electrode of thetransistor 111. Thesecond switch 113 selects timing to apply a predetermined potential to the gate electrode of thetransistor 111 and controls whether or not to supply the predetermined potential to the gate electrode of thetransistor 111. Thethird switch 114 selects timing to apply a predetermined potential for initializing a potential written in thecapacitor 115 and decreases the potential of the first electrode of thetransistor 111. Therefore, thefirst switch 112, thesecond switch 113, and thethird switch 114 are not particularly limited as long as they have the above functions. For example, each of the switches may be a transistor, a diode, or a logic circuit that is a combination thereof. Note that the first to third switches are not particularly necessary if the signal or potential can be applied to the pixel at the above timing. For example, when the signal in accordance with a gray scale level of the pixel can be inputted to the gate electrode of thetransistor 111, thefirst switch 112 does not need to be provided as shown inFIG. 45 . A pixel shown inFIG. 45 includes atransistor 111, asecond switch 113, athird switch 114, and apixel electrode 4540. A first electrode (one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode) of thetransistor 111 is connected to thepixel electrode 4540 and thethird switch 114, and a gate electrode of thetransistor 111 is connected to a second electrode of thetransistor 111 through thesecond switch 113. Note that agate capacitance 4515 of thetransistor 111 is used as a storage capacitor; therefore, thecapacitor 115 inFIG. 1 does not particularly need to be provided. Such a pixel can also suppress variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of thetransistor 111 by operating each switch in accordance with the timing chart shown inFIG. 2 and supplying a desired potential to each electrode. Thus, a desired current can be supplied to thepixel electrode 4540. - Next, the case of employing n-channel transistors as the
first switch 112, thesecond switch 113, and thethird switch 114 is shown inFIG. 4 . Note that a common reference numeral is shared withFIG. 1 to denote a common component, and explanation thereof is omitted. - A
first switching transistor 412 corresponds to thefirst switch 112; asecond switching transistor 413, thesecond switch 113; and athird switching transistor 414, thethird switch 114. Note that the channel length of thetransistor 111 is preferably larger than that of any of thefirst switching transistor 412, thesecond switching transistor 413, and thethird switching transistor 414. - A gate electrode of the
first switching transistor 412 is connected to afirst scan line 118; a first electrode thereof, to asignal line 117; and a second electrode thereof, to a first electrode of acapacitor 115 and a gate electrode of thetransistor 111. - In addition, a gate electrode of the
second switching transistor 413 is connected to asecond scan line 119; a first electrode thereof, to the first electrode of thecapacitor 115 and the gate electrode of thetransistor 111; and a second electrode thereof, to apower supply line 121 and a second electrode of thetransistor 111. - A gate electrode of the
third switching transistor 414 is connected to athird scan line 120; a first electrode thereof, to a second electrode of thecapacitor 115, a first electrode of thetransistor 111, and a pixel electrode of alight emitting element 116; and a second electrode thereof, to apotential supply line 122. - Each switching transistor is turned on when a signal inputted to each scan line is at an H level and turned off when the signal inputted is at an L level.
- One mode of a top view of the pixel shown in
FIG. 4 is shown inFIG. 38 . Aconductive layer 3810 includes a portion functioning as thefirst scan line 118 and the gate electrode of thefirst switching transistor 412, and aconductive layer 3811 includes a portion functioning as thesignal line 117 and the first electrode of thefirst switching transistor 412. In addition, aconductive layer 3812 includes a portion functioning as the second electrode of thefirst switching transistor 412, a portion functioning as the first electrode of thecapacitor 115, and a portion functioning as the first electrode of thesecond switching transistor 413. Aconductive layer 3813 includes a portion functioning as the gate electrode of thesecond switching transistor 413 and is connected to thesecond scan line 119 through awiring 3814. Aconductive layer 3822 includes a portion functioning as the second electrode of thesecond switching transistor 413 and a portion functioning as the second electrode of thetransistor 111 and is connected to thepower supply line 121 through awiring 3815. A conductive layer 3816 includes a portion functioning as the first electrode of thetransistor 111 and is connected to apixel electrode 3844 of the light emitting element. Aconductive layer 3817 includes a portion functioning as the gate electrode of thetransistor 111 and is connected to theconductive layer 3812 through awiring 3818. Aconductive layer 3819 includes a portion functioning as thethird scan line 120 and the gate electrode of thethird switching transistor 414. A conductive layer 3820 includes a portion functioning as the first electrode of thethird switching transistor 414 and is connected to thepixel electrode 3844. Aconductive layer 3821 including a portion functioning as the second electrode of thethird switching transistor 414 is connected to thepotential supply line 122 through awiring 3823. - Note that among the above conductive layers, the portions functioning as the gate electrode, the first electrode, and the second electrode of the
first switching transistor 412 are portions formed so as to be overlapped with asemiconductor layer 3833; the portions functioning as the gate electrode, the first electrode, and the second electrode of thesecond switching transistor 413 are portions formed so as to be overlapped with asemiconductor layer 3834; and the portions functioning as the gate electrode, the first electrode, and the second electrode of thethird switching transistor 414 are portions formed so as to be overlapped with a semiconductor layer 3835. In addition, the portions functioning as the gate electrode, the first electrode, and the second electrode of thetransistor 111 are portions of conductive layers formed so as to be overlapped with asemiconductor layer 3836. Thecapacitor 115 is formed in a portion where theconductive layer 3812 and thepixel electrode 3844 overlap. - The pixel structure in
FIG. 4 can also suppress variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of thetransistor 111 by an operating method similar toFIG. 1 . Thus, current in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to thelight emitting element 116, and variation in luminance can be suppressed. When thetransistor 111 is operated in the saturation region, variation in luminance caused by deterioration of thelight emitting element 116 can also be suppressed. - Further, a manufacturing process can be simplified because the pixel can be formed using only n-channel transistors. In addition, a non-crystalline semiconductor such as an amorphous semiconductor or a semi-amorphous semiconductor (also referred to as a microcrystalline semiconductor) can be used for a semiconductor layer of each transistor included in the pixel. For example, amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) can be used as the amorphous semiconductor. The manufacturing process can further be simplified by using these non-crystalline semiconductors. Accordingly, a reduction in manufacturing cost and an improvement in yield can be achieved.
- Note that the
first switching transistor 412, thesecond switching transistor 413, and thethird switching transistor 414 are operated as mere switches. Therefore, the polarity (conductivity type) of the transistors is not particularly limited. However, it is desirable to use a transistor having a polarity with lower off-current. As the transistor with low off-current, a transistor provided with an LDD region, a transistor having a multi-gate structure, or the like can be used. Alternatively, the switch may be of CMOS type using both an n-channel transistor and a p-channel transistor. - Next, a display device including the pixel of the present invention is explained with reference to
FIG. 6 . - The display device includes a signal
line driver circuit 611, a scanline driver circuit 612, and apixel portion 613, and thepixel portion 613 includes a plurality of signal lines S1 to Sm which is arranged extending from the signalline driver circuit 611 in a column direction, a plurality of first scan lines G1_1 to Gn_1, second scan lines G1_2 to Gn_2, third scan lines G1_3 to Gn_3, and power supply lines P1_1 to Pn_1 which are arranged extending from the scanline driver circuit 612 in a row direction, and a plurality ofpixels 614 which is arranged in matrix in accordance with the signal lines S1 to Sm. In addition, thepixel portion 613 includes a plurality of potential supply lines P1_2 to Pn_2 parallel to the first scan lines G1_1 to Gn_1. Further, eachpixel 614 is connected to a signal line Sj (one of the signal lines S1 to Sm), a first scan line Gi_1 (one of the scan lines G1_1 to Gn_1), a second scan line Gi_2, a third scan line Gi_3, a power supply line Pi_1, and a potential supply line Pi_2. - Note that the signal line Sj, the first scan line Gi_1, the second scan line Gi_2, the third scan line Gi_3, the power supply line Pi_1, and the potential supply line Pi_2 correspond to the
signal line 117, thefirst scan line 118, thesecond scan line 119, thethird scan line 120, thepower supply line 121, and thepotential supply line 122 inFIG. 1 , respectively. - In accordance with signals outputted from the scan
line driver circuit 612, a row of pixels to be operated is selected, and at the same time, the operation shown inFIG. 2 is performed in each of the pixels belonging to the row. Note that in the data write period ofFIG. 2 , a video signal outputted from the signalline driver circuit 611 is written into each pixel of the selected row. At this time, potentials in accordance with luminance data of pixels are inputted to the signal lines S1 to Sm. - As shown in
FIG. 40 , after finishing a data write period of, for example, the i-th row, a signal is written in pixels belonging to the i+1-th row. Note that in order to show the data write period of each row,FIG. 40 shows only the operation of thefirst switch 112 ofFIG. 2 which can precisely show the period. In addition, a pixel that has finished the data write period in the i-th row proceeds to a light emitting period and emits light in accordance with the signal written into the pixel. - Thus, initialization start time can be freely set in respective rows unless data write periods overlap in the respective rows. In addition, since each pixel can emit light except in its address period, a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period (that is, a duty ratio) can be significantly high and can be approximately 100%. Therefore, a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided.
- In addition, since a threshold write period can be set to be long, a threshold voltage of a transistor can be written into a capacitor more accurately. Therefore, reliability as a display device is improved.
- Note that the structure of the display device shown in
FIG. 6 is one example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the potential supply lines P1_2 to Pn_2 do not need to be arranged parallel to the first scan lines G1_1 to Gn_1, and may be arranged parallel to the signal lines S1 to Sm. - In addition, the variation in threshold voltage includes fluctuation in threshold voltage of each transistor over time as well as a difference in threshold voltage among transistors of pixels. Further, the difference in threshold voltage among transistors includes a difference in transistor characteristic at the time of manufacturing the transistors. Note that the transistor here refers to a transistor functioning to supply current to a load such as a light emitting element.
- In this embodiment mode, a pixel with a structure different from
Embodiment Mode 1 is explained with reference toFIGS. 39A and 39B . Note that a common reference numeral is used to denote a component similar toEmbodiment Mode 1, and detailed explanation of the same portion or a portion having a similar function is omitted. - The pixel shown in
FIG. 39A includes atransistor 111, afirst switch 112, asecond switch 113, arectifier element 3914, acapacitor 115, and alight emitting element 116. Note that the pixel is connected to asignal line 117, afirst scan line 118, asecond scan line 119, athird scan line 3920, and apower supply line 121. The pixel shown inFIG. 39A has a structure in which therectifier element 3914 is used as thethird switch 114 inFIG. 1 , and a second electrode of thecapacitor 115, a first electrode of thetransistor 111, and a pixel electrode of thelight emitting element 116 are connected to thethird scan line 3920 through therectifier element 3914. In other words, therectifier element 3914 is connected so that current flows to thethird scan line 3920 from the first electrode of thetransistor 111. It is needless to say that transistors or the like may be used as thefirst switch 112 and thesecond switch 113 as described inEmbodiment Mode 1. In addition, for therectifier element 3914, a Schottky-barrier diode 3951, aPIN diode 3952, or aPN diode 3953 or a diode-connectedtransistor FIG. 39B can be used. Note that, as for thetransistors - Current does not flow to the
rectifier element 3914 when an H-level signal is inputted to thethird scan line 3920, and current flows to therectifier element 3914 when an L-level signal is inputted. Thus, when the pixel inFIG. 39A is operated in a similar manner to that inFIG. 1 , an L-level signal is inputted to thethird scan line 3920 in the initialization period, and an H-level signal is inputted in the other periods. Note that a potential of the L-level signal is considered to be V1−Vth−α-β (α: an arbitrary positive number) because it is required not only that current flow to therectifier element 3914 but also that a potential of the second electrode of thecapacitor 115 be lowered to V1−Vth−α (α: an arbitrary positive number). Note that β denotes a threshold voltage of therectifier element 3914 in a forward direction. - In consideration of the above matters, the pixel structure of
FIGS. 39A and 39B can also suppress variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of thetransistor 111 by operating the pixel in a similar manner toFIG. 1 . Thus, current in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to thelight emitting element 116, and variation in luminance can be suppressed. In addition, in the case of operating thetransistor 111 in the saturation region, variation in luminance caused by deterioration of thelight emitting element 116 can also be suppressed. Further, the use of therectifier element 3914 can reduce the number of wirings and improve an aperture ratio. - Furthermore, the pixel described in this embodiment mode can be applied to the display device of
FIG. 6 . Similarly toEmbodiment Mode 1, initialization start time can be freely set in respective rows unless data write periods in the respective rows overlap. In addition, since each pixel can emit light except in its address period, a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period (that is, a duty ratio) can be significantly high and can be approximately 100%. Therefore, a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided. - In addition, since a threshold write period can be set to be long, a threshold voltage of a transistor which controls a current value flowing to a light emitting element can be written into a capacitor more accurately. Therefore, reliability as a display device is improved.
- This embodiment mode can be freely combined with a pixel structure described in the other embodiment mode as well as
FIG. 1 described above. In other words, therectifier element 3914 can be applied to a pixel described in the other embodiment mode. - In this embodiment mode, pixels having structures different from those in
Embodiment Mode 1 are explained with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9. Note that a common reference numeral is used to denote a component similar toEmbodiment Mode 1, and detailed explanation of the same portion or a portion having a similar function is omitted. - A
pixel 700 shown inFIG. 7 includes atransistor 111, afirst switch 112, asecond switch 113, athird switch 114, acapacitor 115, and alight emitting element 116. Note that thepixel 700 is connected to asignal line 117, afirst scan line 718, asecond scan line 119, athird scan line 120, apower supply line 121, and afirst pixel line 718 of a subsequent row. - In the pixel of
FIG. 1 described inEmbodiment Mode 1, the first electrode of thetransistor 111 is connected to thepotential supply line 122 through thethird switch 114, while it can be connected to thefirst scan line 718 of the subsequent row inFIG. 7 . This is because thepotential supply line 112 can be replaced with anything that can supply a predetermined potential to the first electrode of thetransistor 111 in the initialization period. Therefore, a supplying wiring does not always need to be at a constant potential as long as the wiring can supply a predetermined potential to the first electrode of thetransistor 111 in the initialization period. Thus, thefirst scan line 718 of the subsequent row can be used in place of the potential supply line. By sharing a wiring with a subsequent row as described above, the number of wirings can be reduced and an aperture ratio can be improved. - Note that the pixel structure shown in
FIG. 7 can also suppress variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of thetransistor 111 by operating the pixel in a similar manner toEmbodiment Mode 1. Thus, current in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to thelight emitting element 116, and variation in luminance can be suppressed. In addition, power consumption can be reduced because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. Note that although the operation region of thetransistor 111 is not particularly limited, a more notable effect can be obtained in the saturation region. Further, when thetransistor 111 is operated in the saturation region, variation in current flowing to thetransistor 111 caused by deterioration of thelight emitting element 116 can be suppressed. - Note that a potential of a signal to turn off the
first switch 112 which is supplied from thefirst scan line 718 is V1−Vth−α (α: an arbitrary positive number). Therefore, it is necessary to use thefirst switch 112 which is turned off with the potential V1−Vth−α (α: an arbitrary positive number). It is also necessary to perform operation so that the initialization period of the row to which thepixel 700 belongs does not overlap with a data write period of the row sharing a wiring. - Note that in the case of using an n-channel transistor for the
third switch 114, a potential to turn off thethird switch 114 which is supplied from thethird scan line 120 may be lower than the potential V1−Vth−α that is the potential of the signal to turn off thefirst switch 112 which is supplied from thefirst scan line 718. In this case, a gate-source voltage when the transistor is turned off can be a negative value. Thus, current leakage when thethird switch 114 is turned off can be reduced. - In addition, as shown in a
pixel 800 ofFIG. 8 , asecond scan line 819 of a subsequent row may also be used as thepotential supply line 122 ofFIG. 1 . Thepixel 800 can also perform similar operation toEmbodiment Mode 1. Note that a potential of a signal to turn off thesecond switch 113 which is supplied from thesecond scan line 819 is V1−Vth−α (α: an arbitrary positive number). Therefore, it is necessary to use thesecond switch 113 which is turned off with the potential V1−Vth−α (α: an arbitrary positive number). It is also necessary to perform operation so that the initialization period of the row to which thepixel 800 belongs does not overlap with a threshold write period of the row sharing a wiring. - Note that in the case of using an n-channel transistor for the
third switch 114, a potential of a signal to turn off thethird switch 114 which is supplied from thethird scan line 120 may be lower than the potential V1−Vth−α that is the potential of the signal to turn off thesecond switch 113 which is supplied from thesecond scan line 819. In this case, current leakage when thethird switch 114 is turned off can be reduced. - In addition, as shown in a
pixel 900 ofFIG. 9 , thepotential supply line 122 ofFIG. 1 may also be used as athird scan line 920 of a preceding row. Thepixel 900 can also perform similar operation toEmbodiment Mode 1. Note that a potential of a signal to turn off athird switch 114 which is supplied from thethird scan line 920 is V1−Vth−α (α: an arbitrary positive number). Therefore, it is necessary to use thethird switch 114 which is turned off with the potential V1−Vth−α (α: an arbitrary positive number). It is also necessary to perform operation so that the initialization period of the row to which thepixel 900 belongs does not overlap with an initialization period of the row sharing a wiring. However, there is no particular problem when the initialization period is set to be shorter than the data write period. - Note that although this embodiment mode describes the case of using the
potential supply line 122 ofFIG. 1 also as a scan line of a subsequent or preceding row, any other wiring can be used as long as it can supply the potential V1−Vth−α (α: an arbitrary positive number) in the initialization period. - Further, the pixels described in this embodiment mode can be applied to the display device of
FIG. 6 . Note that initialization start time can be freely set in respective rows in the display device within the range in which there is limitation on operation of each of the pixels shown in FIGS. 7 to 9 and data write periods in the respective rows do not overlap. In addition, since each pixel can emit light except in its address period, a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period (that is, a duty ratio) can be significantly high and can be approximately 100%. Therefore, a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided. - In addition, since a threshold write period can be set to be long, a threshold voltage of a transistor which controls a current value flowing to a light emitting element can be written into a capacitor more accurately. Therefore, reliability as a display device is improved.
- This embodiment mode can be freely combined with any of the pixel structures described in
Embodiment Modes FIG. 1 described above. - In this embodiment mode, a pixel having a structure different from
Embodiment Mode 1 is explained with reference toFIG. 10 . Note that a common reference numeral is used to denote a component similar toEmbodiment Mode 1, and detailed explanation of the same portion or a portion having a similar function is omitted. - A pixel shown in
FIG. 10 includes atransistor 1011, afirst switch 112, asecond switch 113, athird switch 114, acapacitor 115, and alight emitting element 116. Note that the pixel is connected to asignal line 117, afirst scan line 118, asecond scan line 119, athird scan line 120, apower supply line 121, and apotential supply line 122. - The
transistor 1011 in this embodiment mode is a multi-gate transistor in which two transistors are connected in series, and is provided in the same position as thetransistor 111 inEmbodiment Mode 1. Note that the number of transistors connected in series is not particularly limited. - By operating the pixel shown in
FIG. 10 in a similar manner toEmbodiment Mode 1, variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of thetransistor 1011 can be suppressed. Thus, current in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to thelight emitting element 116, and variation in luminance can be suppressed. In addition, power consumption can be reduced because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. Note that although the operation region of thetransistor 1011 is not particularly limited, a more notable effect can be obtained in the saturation region. - Further, when the
transistor 1011 is operated in the saturation region, variation in current flowing to thetransistor 1011 caused by deterioration of thelight emitting element 116 can be suppressed. - When channel widths of the two transistors connected in series are equal to each other, a channel length L of the
transistor 1011 in this embodiment mode is equal to the sum of channel lengths of the respective transistors. Thus, a current value which is closer to a constant value can be easily obtained in the saturation region regardless of a drain-source voltage Vds. In particular, thetransistor 1011 is effective when it is difficult to manufacture a transistor having a long channel length L. Note that a connection portion of the two transistors functions as a resistor. - Note that it is acceptable as long as the
transistor 1011 functions to control a current value supplied to thelight emitting element 116, and the kind of the transistor is not particularly limited. Therefore, a thin film transistor (TFT) using a crystalline semiconductor film, a thin film transistor using a non-single crystalline semiconductor film typified by an amorphous silicon film or a polycrystalline silicon film, a transistor formed using a semiconductor substrate or an SOI substrate, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, or a bipolar transistor, a transistor using an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube, or another transistor can be used. - In the pixel shown in
FIG. 10 , transistors can be used for thefirst switch 112, thesecond switch 113, and thethird switch 114 similarly to the pixel shown inFIG. 1 . - Furthermore, the pixel described in this embodiment mode can be applied to the display device of
FIG. 6 . Similarly toEmbodiment Mode 1, initialization start time can be freely set in respective rows unless data write periods in the respective rows overlap. In addition, since each pixel can emit light except in its address period, a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period (that is, a duty ratio) can be significantly high and can be approximately 100%. Therefore, a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided. - In addition, since a threshold write period can be set to be long, a threshold voltage of a transistor which controls a current value flowing to a light emitting element can be written into a capacitor more accurately. Therefore, reliability as a display device is improved.
- Note that the structure of the
transistor 1011 is not limited to that in which transistors are connected in series, and may be that in which transistors are connected in parallel like atransistor 1111 shown inFIG. 11 . Thetransistor 1111 can supply larger current to thelight emitting element 116. In addition, since transistor characteristics are averaged by two transistors connected in parallel, original characteristic variation of the transistors included in thetransistor 1111 can be reduced. When the variation is reduced, variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of the transistor can be suppressed more easily by the operation shown inFIG. 2 . - This embodiment mode can also be applied to any of the pixel structures described in the other embodiment modes as well as
FIG. 1 described above. - In this embodiment mode, a pixel structure which averages deterioration of transistors over time by periodically switching the transistors which control a current value supplied to a light emitting element in the pixel of the present invention is explained with reference to
FIG. 12 . - A pixel shown in
FIG. 12 includes afirst transistor 1201, asecond transistor 1202, afirst switch 1212, asecond switch 1213, athird switch 1214, afourth switch 1203, afifth switch 1204, acapacitor 1215, and alight emitting element 1216. Note that the pixel is connected to asignal line 1217, afirst scan line 1218, asecond scan line 1219, athird scan line 1220, apower supply line 1221, and apotential supply line 1222. In addition, although not shown inFIG. 12 , the pixel is also connected to fourth and fifth scan lines which control thefourth switch 1203 and thefifth switch 1204 to be turned on and off. In this embodiment mode, thefirst transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202 are n-channel transistors, and each transistor is turned on when a gate-source voltage (Vgs) exceeds a threshold voltage. In addition, a pixel electrode of thelight emitting element 1216 is an anode, and anopposite electrode 1223 thereof is a cathode. Note that a gate-source voltage of a transistor is referred to as Vgs and a voltage accumulated in a capacitor is referred to as Vcs. A threshold voltage of thefirst transistor 1201 is referred to as Vth1 and that of thesecond transistor 1202 is referred to as Vth2. Thepower supply line 1221, thepotential supply line 1222, and thesignal line 1217 are referred to as a first wiring, a second wiring, and a third wiring, respectively. - A first electrode of the
first transistor 1201 is connected to the pixel electrode of thelight emitting element 1216 through thefourth switch 1203; a second electrode thereof, to thepower supply line 1221; and a gate electrode thereof, to thepower supply line 1221 through thesecond switch 1213. In addition, the gate electrode of thefirst transistor 1201 is also connected to thesignal line 1217 through thefirst switch 1212, and the first electrode of thefirst transistor 1201 is also connected to thepotential supply line 1222 through thefourth switch 1203 and thethird switch 1214. - A first electrode of the
second transistor 1202 is connected to the pixel electrode of thelight emitting element 1216 through thefifth switch 1204; a second electrode thereof, to thepower supply line 1221; and a gate electrode thereof, to thepower supply line 1221 through thesecond switch 1213. The gate electrode of thesecond transistor 1202 is also connected to thesignal line 1217 through thefirst switch 1212, and the first electrode of thesecond transistor 1202 is also connected to thepotential supply line 1222 through thefifth switch 1204 and thethird switch 1214. Note that the gate electrodes of thefirst transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202 are connected to each other; the second electrodes of thefirst transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202 are connected to each other; and the first electrodes of thefirst transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202 are connected to each other though thefourth switch 1203 and thefifth switch 1204. - Furthermore, the connected gate electrodes of the
first transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202 are connected to the first electrode of thefirst transistor 1201 through thecapacitor 1215 and thefourth switch 1203 and also connected to the first electrode of thesecond transistor 1202 through thecapacitor 1215 and thefifth switch 1204. In other words, a first electrode of thecapacitor 1215 is connected to the gate electrodes of thefirst transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202 and a second electrode of thecapacitor 1215 is connected to the first electrodes of thefirst transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202 through the respective switches. Note that thecapacitor 1215 may be formed by sandwiching an insulating film between a wiring, a semiconductor layer, and an electrode or can be omitted by using gate capacitances of thefirst transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202. - Note that the
first switch 1212, thesecond switch 1213, and thethird switch 1214 are controlled to be turned on and off by inputting signals to thefirst scan line 1218, thesecond scan line 1219, and thethird scan line 1220, respectively. InFIG. 12 , scan lines which control thefourth switch 1203 and thefifth switch 1204 to be turned on and off are omitted. - A signal in accordance with a pixel gray scale level which corresponds to a video signal, that is, a potential in accordance with luminance data is inputted to the
signal line 1217. - Next, the operation of the pixel shown in
FIG. 12 is explained with reference to a timing chart ofFIG. 13 . Note that one frame period corresponding to a period for displaying an image for one screen inFIG. 13 is divided into an initialization period, a threshold write period, a data write period, and a light emitting period. - Note that a potential V1 is supplied to the
opposite electrode 1223 of thelight emitting element 1216, and when a higher value between Vth1 and Vth2 is referred to as Vth, a potential V1−Vth−α (α: an arbitrary positive number) is supplied to thepotential supply line 1222. In addition, the potential V1 and a potential V2 are supplied to thepower supply line 1221 in an address period and in the light emitting period, respectively. Note that V2>V1. - Here, the potential of the
opposite electrode 1223 of thelight emitting element 1216 is equal to the potential of thepower supply line 1221 in the address period for the purpose of explaining operation. However, when the minimum potential difference which is necessary for thelight emitting element 1216 to emit light is referred to as VEL, it is acceptable as long as the potential of theopposite electrode 1223 is higher than a potential V1−Vth−α-VEL_In addition, it is acceptable as long as the potential V2 of thepower supply line 1221 in the light emitting period is higher than the sum of the potential of theopposite electrode 1223 and the minimum potential difference (VEL) which is necessary for thelight emitting element 1216 to emit light. However, since the potential of theopposite electrode 1223 is V1 here for the purpose of explanation, it is acceptable as long as V2 is higher than V1+VEL. - First, in the initialization period as shown in (A) in
FIG. 13 , thefirst switch 1212 and thefifth switch 1204 are turned off and thesecond switch 1213, thethird switch 1214, and thefourth switch 1203 are turned on. At this time, the first electrode of thefirst transistor 1201 serves as a source electrode, and a potential thereof is V1−Vth−α. On the other hand, a potential of the gate electrode of thefirst transistor 1201 is V1. Thus, a gate-source voltage Vgs of thefirst transistor 1201 is Vth+α and thus thefirst transistor 1201 is turned on. Then, Vth+α is held by thecapacitor 1215 positioned between the gate electrode and the first electrode of thefirst transistor 1201. - Next, in the threshold write period shown in (B) in
FIG. 13 , thethird switch 1214 is turned off. Therefore, the potential of the first electrode, i.e. the source electrode of thefirst transistor 1201 rises gradually and when it reaches V1−Vth1, thefirst transistor 1201 is turned off. Thus, a voltage held by thecapacitor 1215 is Vth1. - Next, in the data write period shown in (C) in
FIG. 13 , thefirst switch 1212 is turned on and a potential (V1+Vdata) in accordance with luminance data is inputted from thesignal line 1217 after turning off thesecond switch 1213. At this time, the voltage Vcs held by thecapacitor 1215 is Vth1+Vdata, and thus thefirst transistor 1201 is turned on. Note that when a potential Vdata≦0 is inputted, thefirst transistor 1201 can be turned off so that thelight emitting element 1216 does not emit light. - Next, in the light emitting period shown in (D) in
FIG. 13 , thefirst switch 1212 is turned off and the potential of thepower supply line 1221 is set to V2. At this time, the gate-source voltage Vgs of thefirst transistor 1201 is equal to Vth1+Vdata, and current in accordance with this Vgs flows to thefirst transistor 1201 and thelight emitting element 1216, so that thelight emitting element 1216 emits light. - According to such operation, the current flowing to the
light emitting element 1216 does not depend on the threshold voltage (Vth1) of thefirst transistor 1201 regardless of whether the operation region of thefirst transistor 1201 is either the saturation region or the linear region. - Furthermore, in an initialization period of a subsequent one frame period shown in (E) in
FIG. 13 , thefourth switch 1203 is turned off and thesecond switch 1213, thethird switch 1214, and thefifth switch 1204 are turned on. At this time, the first electrode of thesecond transistor 1202 serves as a source electrode, and a potential thereof is V1−Vth−α. On the other hand, a potential of the gate electrode of thesecond transistor 1202 is V1. Thus, a gate-source voltage Vgs of thesecond transistor 1202 is Vth+α, so that thesecond transistor 1202 is turned on. Then, Vth+α is held by thecapacitor 1215 positioned between the gate electrode and the first electrode of thesecond transistor 1202. - Next, in the threshold write period shown in (F) in
FIG. 13 , thethird switch 1214 is turned off. Therefore, the potential of the first electrode, i.e. the source electrode of thesecond transistor 1202 rises gradually and when it reaches V1−Vth2, thesecond transistor 1202 is turned off. Thus, a voltage held by thecapacitor 1215 is Vth2. - Next, in the data write period shown in (G) in
FIG. 13 , thefirst switch 1212 is turned on and a potential (V1+Vdata) in accordance with luminance data is inputted from thesignal line 1217 after turning off thesecond switch 1213. At this time, the voltage Vcs held by thecapacitor 1215 is Vth2+Vdata, and thus thesecond transistor 1202 is turned on. - Next, in the light emitting period shown in (H) in
FIG. 13 , thefirst switch 1212 is turned off and the potential of thepower supply line 1221 is set to V2. At this time, the gate-source voltage Vgs of thesecond transistor 1202 is equal to Vth2+Vdata, and current in accordance with this Vgs flows to thesecond transistor 1202 and thelight emitting element 1216, so that thelight emitting element 1216 emits light. - The current flowing to the
light emitting element 1216 does not depend on the threshold voltage (Vth2) regardless of whether the operation region of thesecond transistor 1202 is either the saturation region or the linear region. - Therefore, by controlling current supplied to the light emitting element using either the
first transistor 1201 or thesecond transistor 1202, variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of the transistor can be suppressed and a current value in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to thelight emitting element 1216. Note that by reducing a load on each transistor by switching between thefirst transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202, changes over time in threshold voltage of the transistors can be reduced. - Accordingly, variation in luminance caused by variation in threshold voltages of the
first transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202 can be suppressed. In addition, since the potential of the opposite electrode is fixed, power consumption can be reduced. - Further, in the case of operating the
first transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202 in the saturation region, variation in current flowing to each transistor due to deterioration of thelight emitting element 1216 can also be suppressed. - Note that in the case of operating the
first transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202 in the saturation region, the channel lengths L of these transistors are preferably long. - In addition, since a reverse bias voltage is applied to the
light emitting element 1216 in the initialization period, a shorted portion in the light emitting element can be insulated and deterioration of the light emitting element can be suppressed. Thus, the lifetime of the light emitting element can be extended. - Note that since the variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of the transistors can be suppressed, supply destination of the current controlled by the transistors is not particularly limited. Therefore, an EL element (an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element, or an EL element containing an organic material and an inorganic material), an electron emitting element, a liquid crystal element, electronic ink, or the like can be used as the
light emitting element 1216 shown inFIG. 12 . - In addition, it is acceptable as long as the
first transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202 function to control a current value supplied to thelight emitting element 1216, and the kind of the transistors is not particularly limited. Therefore, a thin film transistor (TFT) using a crystalline semiconductor film, a thin film transistor using a non-single crystalline semiconductor film typified by an amorphous silicon film or a polycrystalline silicon film, a transistor formed using a semiconductor substrate or an SOI substrate, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, a bipolar transistor, a transistor using an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube, or another transistor can be used. - The
first switch 1212 selects timing to input a signal in accordance with a pixel gray scale level to the capacitor. Thesecond switch 1213 selects timing to apply a predetermined potential to the gate electrode of thefirst transistor 1201 or thesecond transistor 1202. Thethird switch 1214 selects timing to apply a predetermined potential for initializing a potential written in thecapacitor 1215. Therefore, thefirst switch 1212, thesecond switch 1213, and thethird switch 1214 are not particularly limited as long as they have the above functions. For example, each of the switches may be a transistor, a diode, or a logic circuit that is a combination thereof. Note that the first to third switches are not particularly necessary if the signal or potential can be applied to the pixel at the above timing. Further, thefourth switch 1203 and thefifth switch 1204 are also not particularly limited, each of which may be, for example, a transistor, a diode, or a logic circuit that is a combination thereof. - In the case of using n-channel transistors for the
first switch 1212, thesecond switch 1213, thethird switch 1214, thefourth switch 1203, and thefifth switch 1204, a manufacturing process can be simplified because the pixel can be formed using only an n-channel transistors. In addition, a non-crystalline semiconductor such as an amorphous semiconductor or a semi-amorphous semiconductor (also referred to as a microcrystalline semiconductor) can be used for a semiconductor layer of each transistor included in the pixel. For example, amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) can be used as the amorphous semiconductor. The manufacturing process can further be simplified by using these non-crystalline semiconductors. Accordingly, a reduction in manufacturing cost and an improvement in yield can be achieved. - Note that in the case of using transistors for the
first switch 1212, thesecond switch 1213, thethird switch 1214, thefourth switch 1203, and thefifth switch 1204, the polarity (conductivity type) of the transistors is not particularly limited. However, it is desirable to use a transistor having a polarity with lower off-current. - In addition, the
first transistor 1201 and thefourth switch 1203, and thesecond transistor 1202 and thefifth switch 1204 are interchangeable as shown inFIG. 41 . In other words, the first electrodes of thefirst transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202 are connected to the gate electrodes of thefirst transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202 through thecapacitor 1215. The second electrode of thefirst transistor 1201 is connected to thepower supply line 1221 through thefourth switch 1203, and the second electrode of thesecond transistor 1202 is connected to thepower supply line 1221 through thefifth switch 1204. -
FIGS. 12 and 41 show the case where the number of elements arranged in parallel is two using a transistor and a switch as a set, that is, using thefirst transistor 1201 and thefourth switch 1203 as a set, and thesecond transistor 1202 and thefifth switch 1204 as a set. However, the number of elements arranged in parallel is not particularly limited. - By applying the pixel described in this embodiment mode to the display device of
FIG. 6 , initialization start time can be freely set in respective rows similarly toEmbodiment Mode 1 unless data write periods in the respective rows overlap. In addition, since each pixel can emit light except in its address period, a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period (that is, a duty ratio) can be significantly high and can be approximately 100%. Therefore, a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided. - In addition, since a threshold write period can be set to be long, a threshold voltage of a transistor which controls a current value flowing to a light emitting element can be written into a capacitor more accurately. Thus, reliability as a display device is improved.
- Note that the
potential supply line 1222 can also be used as a wiring of another row similarly to Embodiment Mode 3. In addition, similarly to Embodiment Mode 4, a multi-gate transistor in which transistors are connected in series, or transistors arranged in parallel may be used for each of thefirst transistor 1201 and thesecond transistor 1202. Moreover, this embodiment mode can be applied to any of the pixel structures described inEmbodiment Modes 1 to 4. - In this embodiment mode, a pixel having a structure different from
Embodiment Mode 1 is described. A common reference numeral is used to denote a component similar toEmbodiment Mode 1, and detailed explanation of the same portion or a portion having a similar function is omitted. Note that such portions are operated in a similar manner toEmbodiment Mode 1. - In this embodiment mode, a pixel structure which forcibly prevents current from flowing to a
light emitting element 116 is explained. In other words, this embodiment mode aims to obtain a display device in which an afterimage is hardly seen and moving image characteristics are excellent by forcibly putting a light emitting element into a non-light emitting state. - One of such pixel structures is shown in
FIG. 29 . A pixel shown inFIG. 29 includes afourth switch 2901 in addition to thetransistor 111, thefirst switch 112, thesecond switch 113, thethird switch 114, thecapacitor 115, and thelight emitting element 116 which are included in the pixel ofFIG. 1 . The pixel is connected to afourth scan line 2902 in addition to thesignal line 117, thefirst scan line 118, thesecond scan line 119, thethird scan line 120, thepower supply line 121, and thepotential supply line 122. - In
FIG. 29 , thefourth switch 2901 is connected in parallel with thecapacitor 115. Therefore, the gate electrode and the first electrode of thetransistor 111 are short-circuited when thefourth switch 2901 is turned on. Then, since a gate-source voltage of thetransistor 111 held by thecapacitor 115 can be 0 V, thetransistor 111 is turned off and thelight emitting element 116 can be put into a non-light emitting state. Note that thefourth switch 2901 can be controlled to be turned on and off by scanning pixels from row to row with a signal inputted to thefourth scan line 2902. - According to such operation, a signal written in the pixel is erased. Thus, an erase period in which the light emitting element is forcibly put in a non-light emitting state is provided until a subsequent initialization period. In other words, black display is inserted. Accordingly, an afterimage becomes less perceptible and moving image characteristics can be improved.
- Meanwhile, as a driving method of a display device for expressing a gray scale, there are an analog gray scale method and a digital gray scale method. The analog gray scale method includes a method to control the emission intensity of a light emitting element in an analog manner and a method to control the emission time of a light emitting element in an analog manner. Between the two, the method to control the emission intensity of a light emitting element in an analog manner is often used. On the other hand, in the digital gray scale method, a light emitting element is turned on/off by control in a digital manner to express a gray scale. The digital gray scale method has the advantage of high resistance to noise because processing can be performed using a digital signal. However, there are only two states, that is, a light emitting state and a non-light emitting state, so that only two gray scale levels can be expressed. Therefore, multiple level gray scale display is attempted by using another method in combination. As a technique for multiple level gray scale display, there are an area gray scale method in which light emission area of a pixel is weighted and selected to perform gray scale display and a time gray scale method in which light emission time is weighted and selected to perform gray scale display.
- In the case of combining the digital gray scale method and the time gray scale method, one frame period is divided into a plurality of subframe periods (SFn) as shown in
FIG. 42 . Each subframe period includes an address period (Ta) including an initialization period, a threshold write period, and a data write period and a light emitting period (Ts). Note that subframe periods, the number of which corresponds to the number of display bits n, are provided in one frame period. In addition, a ratio of lengths of light emitting periods in respective subframe periods is set to satisfy 2(n-1 ): 2(n-2): . . . : 2: 1; light emission or non-light emission of a light emitting element is selected in each light emitting period; and a gray scale is expressed using a difference in total time in one frame period for which the light emitting element emits light. When the total time of light emission in one frame period is long, luminance is high, and when short, luminance is low. Note thatFIG. 42 shows an example of a 4-bit gray scale, in which one frame period is divided into four subframe periods and 24=16 gray scale levels can be expressed by a combination of light emitting periods. Note that a gray scale can also be expressed when a ratio of lengths of light emitting periods is not a power-of-two ratio. Further, a subframe period may further be divided. - Note that in the case of attempting multiple level gray scale display by using the time gray scale method as described above, the length of a light emitting period of a lower-order bit is short. Therefore, when data write operation is started immediately upon termination of a light emitting period of a preceding subframe period, it overlaps with data write operation of the preceding subframe period, and thus normal operation cannot be performed. Therefore, by providing an erase period as described above in a subframe period, light emission shorter than data write periods necessary for all rows can be expressed. In other words, a light emitting period can be freely set.
- The present invention is effective particularly in the display analog gray scale method. Furthermore, it is effective to provide an erase period because a light emitting period can be freely set also in a method combining the digital gray scale method and the time gray scale method.
- The erase period may be provided by providing another switch in the path of current flow from the
power supply line 121 to the pixel electrode of thelight emitting element 116 through thetransistor 111 and turning off the switch by scanning pixels row by row. - One of such structures is shown in
FIG. 30 . In the structure ofFIG. 30 , afourth switch 3001 is connected between the second electrode of thetransistor 111 and thepower supply line 121, in addition to the pixel structure ofFIG. 1 . Thefourth switch 3001 is controlled to be turned on and off by a signal inputted to afourth scan line 3002. - When a connection point of the first electrode of the
transistor 111 and the pixel electrode of thelight emitting element 116 is referred to as anode 3003, afourth switch 3701 may be connected between thenode 3003 and the first electrode of thetransistor 111 as shown inFIG. 37 . Thefourth switch 3701 is controlled to be turned on and off by a signal inputted to thefourth scan line 3702. - Thus, an erase period can be provided by turning off the fourth switch. In addition, when operating the pixels shown in
FIGS. 30 and 37 similarly toEmbodiment Mode 1, power consumption can also be reduced by turning off the fourth switch in an initialization period. - Note that the erase period can be provided by connecting a
fourth switch 4301 between thenode 3003 and the pixel electrode of thelight emitting element 116 as shown inFIG. 43 as well asFIGS. 30 and 37 . Alternatively, the erase period can be provided by connecting afourth switch 4401 between a connection point of the second electrode of thetransistor 111 and thesecond switch 113, and thepower supply line 121 as shown inFIG. 44 . - Further, the erase period may be forcibly provided by inputting a potential to the gate electrode of the
transistor 111. - One of such structures is shown in
FIG. 31 . The structure ofFIG. 31 includes arectifier element 3101 in addition to the pixel structure ofFIG. 1 , and the gate electrode of thetransistor 111 and afourth scan line 3102 are connected to each other through therectifier element 3101. Note that when thetransistor 111 is an n-channel transistor, therectifier element 3101 is connected so that current flows from the gate electrode of thetransistor 111 to thefourth scan line 3102. As to thefourth scan line 3102, an L-level signal is inputted only when forcibly turning off thetransistor 111, and otherwise, an H-level signal is inputted. Then, current does not flow to therectifier element 3101 when the fourth scan line is at an H level, and current flows to thefourth scan line 3102 from thetransistor 111 when at an L level. By causing current to flow to thefourth scan line 3102 as described above, a voltage held by thecapacitor 115 is lowered to the threshold voltage (Vth) of thetransistor 111 or less, and thetransistor 111 is forcibly turned off. Note that an L-level potential needs to be determined so that the potential of the gate electrode of thetransistor 111 does not become equal to or lower than a potential which is higher than the L-level potential by a forward threshold voltage of therectifier element 3101. In addition, in the case of using a switch which is turned off with the L-level potential for each of thefirst switch 112 and thesecond switch 113, thefourth scan line 3102 may be substituted with thefirst scan line 118 or thesecond scan line 119. - Note that a pixel structure is not particularly limited to the above structure because an afterimage can be made less perceptible by inserting black display as long as the pixel structure includes a means to forcibly put a light emitting element into a non-light emitting state.
- Note that the Schottky-barrier diode, the PIN diode, the PN diode, the diode-connected transistor, or the like shown in
FIG. 39B can be used for therectifier element 3101. - Note that the switch for providing the erase period described in this embodiment mode can be applied to the pixel structure described in any of the other embodiment modes as well as that of
FIG. 1 described above. - Without providing such a switch, the initialization period can also serve as the erase period by setting the initialization period to be long. Thus, moving image characteristics can be improved by setting the length of a period in which black display is desired to be performed in order to make an afterimage less perceptible to be equal to that of the initialization period when operating any of the pixels described in
Embodiment Modes 1 to 5. Further, black display may be inserted by equalizing the potential of thepower supply line 121 to the potential of theopposite electrode 123 in the light emitting period. - Note that when the
transistor 111 is turned on in the data write period in the pixel structure shown inFIG. 30 , current flow to thetransistor 111 can be blocked by turning off thefourth switch 3001. Thus, since variation in potential of the second electrode of thecapacitor 115 which is connected to the source electrode of thetransistor 111 can be suppressed, a voltage Vth+Vdata can be held by thecapacitor 115 more accurately. Consequently, more accurate current in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to thelight emitting element 116. - In addition, since the pixel structure shown in
FIG. 37 can also suppress variation in potential of the second electrode of thecapacitor 115 by turning off thefourth switch 3701 in the data write period also in, a voltage Vth+Vdata can be held by thecapacitor 115 more accurately. Thus, more accurate current in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to thelight emitting element 116. - Note that the pixel described in this embodiment mode can be applied to the display device described in
Embodiment Mode 1. Accordingly, a display device with less luminance variation and excellent moving image characteristics can be obtained. - In this embodiment mode, the case of applying a p-channel transistor to a transistor which controls a current value supplied to a light emitting element is explained with reference to
FIG. 14 . - A pixel shown in
FIG. 14 includes atransistor 1411, afirst switch 1412, asecond switch 1413, athird switch 1414, acapacitor 1415, and alight emitting element 1416. Note that the pixel is connected to asignal line 1417, afirst scan line 1418, asecond scan line 1419, athird scan line 1420, apower supply line 1421, and apotential supply line 1422. In this embodiment mode, thetransistor 1411 is a p-channel transistor, and is turned on when the absolute value of its gate-source voltage (|vgs|) exceeds that of a threshold voltage (|vth|) (when Vgs is below Vth). In addition, a pixel electrode of thelight emitting element 1416 is a cathode and anopposite electrode 1423 thereof is an anode. Note that the absolute value of a gate-source voltage of the transistor is denoted by |Vgs|, the absolute value of a threshold voltage is denoted by |vth|, and thepower supply line 1421, thepotential supply line 1422, and thesignal line 1417 are also referred to as a first wiring, a second wiring, and a third wiring, respectively. - A first electrode (one of either a source electrode or a drain electrode) of the
transistor 1411 is connected to the pixel electrode of thelight emitting element 1416; a second electrode (the other of either the source electrode or the drain electrode) of thetransistor 1411, to thepower supply line 1421; and a gate electrode of thesecond transistor 1411, to thepower supply line 1421 through thesecond switch 1413. In addition, the gate electrode of thetransistor 1411 is also connected to thesignal line 1417 through thefirst switch 1412, and the first electrode thereof is also connected to thepotential supply line 1422 through thethird switch 1414. - Further, the
capacitor 1415 is connected between the gate electrode and the first electrode of thetransistor 1411. In other words, a first electrode of thecapacitor 1415 is connected to the gate electrode of thetransistor 1411 and a second electrode thereof is connected to the first electrode of thetransistor 1411. Note that thecapacitor 1415 may be formed by sandwiching an insulating film between a wiring, a semiconductor layer, and an electrode or can be omitted by using a gate capacitance of thetransistor 1411. - Note that the
first switch 1412, thesecond switch 1413, and thethird switch 1414 are controlled to be turned on and off by inputting signals to thefirst scan line 1418, thesecond scan line 1419, and thethird scan line 1420, respectively. - A signal in accordance with a pixel gray scale level which corresponds to a video signal, that is, a potential in accordance with luminance data is inputted to the
signal line 1417. - Next, the operation of the pixel shown in
FIG. 14 is explained with reference to a timing chart ofFIG. 15 andFIGS. 16A to 16D. Note that one frame period corresponding to a period for displaying an image for one screen inFIG. 14 is divided into an initialization period, a threshold write period, a data write period, and a light emitting period. The initialization period, the threshold write period, and the data write period are collectively referred to as an address period. The length of one frame period is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1/60 second or less so that an image viewer does not perceive flicker. - Note that a potential V1 is inputted to the
opposite electrode 1423 of thelight emitting element 1416 and a potential V1+|Vth|+α (α: an arbitrary positive number) is inputted to thepotential supply line 1422. In addition, to thepower supply line 1421, V1 is inputted in the address period and a potential V2 is inputted in the light emitting period. Note that V2<V1. - Here, the potential of the
opposite electrode 1423 of thelight emitting element 1416 is equal to the potential of thepower supply line 1421 in the address period for the purpose of explaining operation. However, when the minimum potential difference which is necessary for thelight emitting element 1416 to emit light is referred to as VEL, it is acceptable as long as the potential of theopposite electrode 1423 is equal to or greater than V1 and less than a potential V1+|Vth|+α+VEL. In addition, it is acceptable as long as the potential V2 of thepower supply line 1421 in the light emitting period is lower than a value obtained by subtracting the minimum potential difference (VEL) which is necessary for thelight emitting element 1416 to emit light from the potential of theopposite electrode 1423. However, since the potential of theopposite electrode 1423 is V1 here for the purpose of explanation, it is acceptable as long as V2 is less than V1−VEL. - First, the
first switch 1412 is turned off and thesecond switch 1413 and thethird switch 1414 are turned on in the initialization period as shown in (A) inFIG. 15 andFIG. 16A . At this time, the first electrode of thetransistor 1411 serves as a source electrode, and a potential thereof is equal to that of thepotential supply line 1422, that is, V1+|Vth|+α. On the other hand, a potential of the gate electrode of thetransistor 1411 is V1. Thus, the absolute value of the gate-source voltage |Vgs| of thetransistor 1411 is |Vth|+α, and thus thetransistor 1411 is turned on. Then, |Vth|+α is held by thecapacitor 1415 provided between the gate electrode and the first electrode of thetransistor 1411. - Next, the
third switch 1414 is turned off in the threshold write period shown in (B) inFIG. 15 andFIG. 16B . Therefore, the potential of the first electrode, i.e. the source electrode of thetransistor 1411 drops gradually and when it reaches V1+|Vth|, thetransistor 1411 is turned off. Thus, a voltage held by thecapacitor 1415 is |Vth|. - In the subsequent data write period shown in (C) in
FIG. 15 andFIG. 16C , thefirst switch 1412 is turned on and a potential (V1−Vdata) in accordance with luminance data is inputted from thesignal line 1417 after turning off thesecond switch 1413. At this time, the voltage Vcs held by thecapacitor 1415 can be represented by Formula (5) where capacitances of thecapacitor 1415 and thelight emitting element 1416 are referred to as C1 and C2, respectively. - Note that C2>>C1 because the
light emitting element 1416 is thinner and has a larger electrode area than thecapacitor 1415. Thus, from C2/(C1+C2 )≈1, the voltage Vcs held by thecapacitor 1415 is represented by Formula (6), and thetransistor 1411 is turned on.
Vcs=|−|Vth|−Vdata| (6) - Next, in the light emitting period shown in (D) in
FIG. 15 andFIG. 16D , thefirst switch 1412 is turned off and the potential of thepower supply line 1421 is set to V2. At this time, the gate-source voltage Vgs of thetransistor 1411 is equal to −Vdata−|Vth|, and current in accordance with this Vgs flows to thetransistor 1411 and thelight emitting element 1416, so that thelight emitting element 1416 emits light. - Note that a current I flowing to the light emitting element is represented by Formula (7) when the
transistor 1411 is operated in the saturation region. - Since the
transistor 1411 is a p-channel transistor, Vth is less than 0. Thus, Formula (7) can be transformed into Formula (8). - In addition, the current I flowing to the light emitting element is represented by Formula (9) when the
transistor 1411 is operated in the linear region. - From Vth<0, Formula (9) can be transformed into Formula (10).
- Here, W denotes a channel width of the
transistor 1411; L, a channel length; μ, a mobility; and Cox, a storage capacitance. - According to Formulas (8) and (10), the current flowing to the
light emitting element 1416 does not depend on the threshold voltage (Vth) of thetransistor 1411 regardless of whether the operation region of thetransistor 1411 is either the saturation region or the linear region. Therefore, variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of thetransistor 1411 can be suppressed and a current value in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to thelight emitting element 1416. - Accordingly, variation in luminance caused by variation in threshold voltage of the
transistor 1411 can be suppressed. In addition, power consumption can be reduced because operation is performed with the opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. - Furthermore, when the
transistor 1411 is operated in the saturation region, variation in luminance due to deterioration of thelight emitting element 1416 can also be suppressed. When thelight emitting element 1416 is deteriorated, VEL of thelight emitting element 1416 increases and the potential of the first electrode, that is, the source electrode of thetransistor 1411 decreases. At this time, the source electrode of thetransistor 1411 is connected to the second electrode of thecapacitor 1415; the gate electrode of thetransistor 1411 is connected to the first electrode of thecapacitor 1415; and the gate electrode side is in a floating state. Therefore, in accordance with the decrease in the source potential, the gate potential of thetransistor 1411 also decreases by the same amount as the decrease in the source potential. Thus, Vgs of thetransistor 1411 does not change. Therefore, the current flowing to thetransistor 1411 and thelight emitting element 1416 is not affected even if the light emitting element is deteriorated. Note that it is found also in Formula (8) that the current I flowing to the light emitting element does not depend on the source potential and a drain potential. - Therefore, when the
transistor 1411 is operated in the saturation region, variation in the luminance caused by variation in the threshold voltage of thetransistor 1411 and deterioration of thelight emitting element 1416 can be suppressed. - Note that in the case of operating the
transistor 1411 in the saturation region, a channel length L of thetransistor 1411 is preferably long to suppress an increase in current amount by avalanche breakdown and channel length modulation. - In addition, since a reverse bias voltage is applied to the
light emitting element 1416 in the initialization period, a shorted portion in the light emitting element can be insulated and deterioration of the light emitting element can be suppressed. Thus, the lifetime of the light emitting element can be extended. - Note that the
light emitting element 1416 shown inFIG. 14 is not particularly limited, and an EL element (an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element, or an EL element containing an organic material and an inorganic material), an electron emitting element, a liquid crystal element, electronic ink, or the like can be used. - In addition, it is acceptable as long as the
transistor 1411 functions to control a current value supplied to thelight emitting element 1416, and the kind of the transistor is not particularly limited. Therefore, a thin film transistor (TFT) using a crystalline semiconductor film, a thin film transistor using a non-single crystalline semiconductor film typified by an amorphous silicon film or a polycrystalline silicon film, a transistor formed using a semiconductor substrate or an SOI substrate, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, or a bipolar transistor, a transistor using an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube, or another transistor can be used. - The
first switch 1412 selects timing to input a signal in accordance with a pixel gray scale level to the capacitor. Thesecond switch 1413 selects timing to apply a predetermined potential to the gate electrode of thetransistor 1411. Thethird switch 1414 selects timing to apply a predetermined potential for initializing a potential written in thecapacitor 1415. Therefore, thefirst switch 1412, thesecond switch 1413, and thethird switch 1414 are not particularly limited as long as they have the above functions. Each of the switches may be a transistor, a diode, or a logic circuit that is a combination thereof. - Note that in the case of using a transistor, a polarity (conductivity type) thereof is not particularly limited. However, it is desirable to use a transistor having a polarity with lower off-current. As an example of the transistor having a polarity with lower off-current, a transistor provided with an LDD region, a transistor having a multi-gate structure, or the like can be given. The switch may be of CMOS type using both an n-channel transistor and a p-channel transistor.
- For example, in the case of applying p-channel transistors to the
first switch 1412, thesecond switch 1413, and thethird switch 1414, an L-level signal is inputted to a scan line which controls on/off of each switch when the switch is desired to be turned on, or an H-level signal is inputted when the switch is desired to be turned off. - In this case, a manufacturing process can be simplified because the pixel can be formed using only p-channel transistors.
- Furthermore, the pixel described in this embodiment mode can be applied to the display device of
FIG. 6 . Similarly toEmbodiment Mode 1, initialization start time can be freely set in respective rows unless data write periods in the respective rows overlap. In addition, since each pixel can emit light except in its address period, a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period (that is, a duty ratio) can be significantly high and can be approximately 100%. Therefore, a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided. - In addition, since a threshold write period can be set to be long, a threshold voltage of a transistor which controls a current value flowing to a light emitting element can be written into a capacitor more accurately. Therefore, reliability as a display device is improved.
- Note that the
potential supply line 1422 can also be used as a wiring of another row similarly to Embodiment Mode 3. In addition, any of the structures of the transistors described inEmbodiment Modes 4 and 5 can be applied to thetransistor 1411. - Moreover, the structure and operation described in Embodiment Mode 6 can also be applied. In addition, the
transistor 1411 can be applied to the pixel structures described inEmbodiment Modes 1 to 6. - Note that in the case of using a rectifier element to provide an erase period, the direction of current flowing to the rectifier element needs to be varied depending on the polarity of a transistor which controls current flowing to a light emitting element. This is explained with reference to
FIG. 32 . - When the
transistor 1411 is a p-channel transistor, arectifier element 3201 is connected so that current flows to the gate electrode of thetransistor 1411 from afourth scan line 3202. As to thefourth scan line 3202, an H-level signal is inputted only when forcibly turning off thetransistor 1411, and otherwise, an L-level signal is inputted. Then, current does not flow to therectifier element 3201 when thefourth scan line 3202 is at an L level, and current flows to thefourth scan line 3202 from thetransistor 1411 when at an H level. By causing current to flow to thefourth scan line 3202 as described above, a potential held by thecapacitor 1415 is lowered to the absolute value of the threshold voltage (|Vth|) of thetransistor 1411 or less, and thus thetransistor 1411 is forcibly turned off. Note that an H-level potential needs to be determined so that the potential of the gate electrode of thetransistor 1411 does not become equal to or higher than a potential which is lower than the H-level potential by a forward threshold voltage of therectifier element 3201. According to such operation, black display is inserted; an afterimage becomes less perceptible; and moving image characteristics can be improved. - In this embodiment mode, one mode of a fragmentary sectional view of a pixel of the present invention is explained with reference to
FIG. 17 . Note that a transistor shown in the fragmentary sectional view in this embodiment mode is a transistor functioning to control a current value supplied to a light emitting element. - First, a base film 1712 is formed over a
substrate 1711 having an insulating surface. As thesubstrate 1711 having an insulating surface, an insulating substrate such as a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate (polyimide, acrylic, polyethylene terephthalate, polycarbonate, polyarylate, polyethersulfone, or the like), or a ceramic substrate; or a metal substrate (tantalum, tungsten, molybdenum, or the like), a semiconductor substrate, or the like on the surface of which an insulating film is formed, can be used. Note that it is necessary to use a substrate which can withstand at least heat generated during a process. - The base film 1712 is formed using a single layer or a plurality of layers (two or more layers) of an insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) film. Note that the base film 1712 may be formed using a sputtering method, a CVD method, or the like. Although the base film 1712 is a single layer in this embodiment mode, it goes without saying that it may be a plurality of layers (two or more layers).
- Next, a
transistor 1713 is formed over the base film 1712. Thetransistor 1713 includes at least asemiconductor layer 1714, agate insulating film 1715 formed over thesemiconductor layer 1714, and agate electrode 1716 formed over thesemiconductor layer 1714 with thegate insulating film 1715 interposed therebetween. Thesemiconductor layer 1714 has a source region and a drain region. - The
semiconductor layer 1714 can be formed using a film having a non-crystalline state (i.e. a non-crystalline semiconductor film) selected from an amorphous semiconductor containing silicon, silicon germanium (SiGe), or the like as well as amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) as its main component, a semi-amorphous semiconductor in which an amorphous state and a crystalline state are mixed, a microcrystalline semiconductor in which crystal grains of 0.5 nm to 20 nm can be observed within an amorphous semiconductor, or a crystalline semiconductor film of polysilicon (p-Si:H) or the like. Note that the microcrystalline state in which crystal grains of 0.5 nm to 20 nm can be observed is referred to as microcrystal. Note that when using a non-crystalline semiconductor film, thesemiconductor layer 1714 may be formed using a sputtering method, a CVD method, or the like, and when using a crystalline semiconductor film, thesemiconductor layer 1714 may be formed by, for example, forming and then crystallizing a non-crystalline semiconductor film. If necessary, a slight amount of an impurity element (such as phosphorus, arsenic, or boron) may be contained in thesemiconductor layer 1714 in addition to the above main component in order to control a threshold voltage of a transistor. - Next, a
gate insulating film 1715 is formed to cover thesemiconductor layer 1714. Thegate insulating film 1715 is formed of a single layer or a plurality of stacked films using, for example, silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon nitride oxide, or the like. Note that a CVD method, a sputtering method, or the like can be used as a film formation method. - Then, a
gate electrode 1716 is formed over thesemiconductor layer 1714 with thegate insulating film 1715 interposed therebetween. Thegate electrode 1716 may be formed of a single layer or may be formed by stacking a plurality of metal films. Note that the gate electrode can be formed using a metal element selected from among tantalum (Ta), tungsten (W), titanium (Ti), molybdenum (Mo), aluminum (Al), copper (Cu), and chromium (Cr) or an alloy or compound material containing the element as its main component. For example, the gate electrode may include a first conductive film and a second conductive film using tantalum nitride (TaN) as a first conductive layer and tungsten (W) as a second conductive layer. - Next, an impurity which imparts n-type or p-type conductivity is selectively added to the
semiconductor layer 1714 using as a mask thegate electrode 1716 or a resist which is formed into a desired shape. In this manner, a channel formation region and an impurity region (including a source region, a drain region, a GOLD region, and an LDD region) are formed in thesemiconductor layer 1714. In addition, thetransistor 1713 can be formed as either an n-channel transistor or a p-channel transistor depending on the conductivity type of an impurity element to be added. - Note that in order to form an
LDD region 1720 in a self-aligned manner inFIG. 17 , a silicon compound, for example, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film is formed to cover thegate electrode 1716 and then etched back to form asidewall 1717. After that, asource region 1718, adrain region 1719, and anLDD region 1720 can be formed by adding an impurity which imparts conductivity to thesemiconductor layer 1714. Therefore, theLDD region 1720 is located below thesidewall 1717. Note that thesidewall 1717 is provided to form theLDD region 1720 in a self-aligned manner, and does not necessarily need to be provided. Note that phosphorus, arsenic, boron, or the like is used as the impurity which imparts conductivity. - Next, a first
interlayer insulating film 1730 is formed by stacking a first insulating film 1721 and a second insulating film 1722 to cover thegate electrode 1716. As the first insulating film 1721 and the second insulating film 1722, an inorganic insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) film or an organic resin film (a photosensitive or non-photosensitive organic resin film) with a low dielectric constant can be used. Alternatively, a film containing siloxane may be used. Note that siloxane is a material in which a skeleton is formed by the bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O), and an organic group (such as an alkyl group or aromatic hydrocarbon) is used as a substituent. Further, a fluoro group may be contained as a substituent. - Note that insulating films made of the same material may be used as the first insulating film 1721 and the second insulating film 1722. In this embodiment mode, the first
interlayer insulating film 1730 has a stacked structure of two layers; however, it may be a single layer or have a stacked structure of three or more layers. - Note that the first insulating film 1721 and the second insulating film 1722 may be formed using a sputtering method, a CVD method, a spin coating method, or the like, and may be formed by a coating method in the case of using an organic resin film or a film containing siloxane.
- After that, source and
drain electrodes 1723 are formed over the firstinterlayer insulating film 1730. Note that the source anddrain electrodes 1723 are connected to thesource region 1718 and thedrain region 1719 through contact holes, respectively. - Note that the source and
drain electrodes 1723 can be formed using a metal such as silver (Ag), gold (Au), copper (Cu), nickel (Ni), platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd), iridium (Ir), rhodium (Rh), tungsten (W), aluminum (Al), tantalum (Ta), molybdenum (Mo), cadmium (Cd), zinc (Zn), iron (Fe), titanium (Ti), silicon (Si), germanium (Ge), zirconium (Zr), or barium (Ba), an alloy thereof, metal nitride thereof, or stacked films thereof. - Next, a second
interlayer insulating film 1731 is formed to cover the source anddrain electrodes 1723. As the secondinterlayer insulating film 1731, an inorganic insulating film, a resin film, or a stacked layer thereof can be used. As the inorganic insulating film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, or a stacked layer thereof can be used. For the resin film, polyimide, polyamide, acrylic, polyimide amide, epoxy, or the like can be used. - A
pixel electrode 1724 is formed over the secondinterlayer insulating film 1731. Next, aninsulator 1725 is formed to cover an end portion of thepixel electrode 1724. Theinsulator 1725 is formed to have a curved surface with curvature at an upper end or a lower end thereof in order to favorably form alayer 1726 containing a light emitting substance later. For example, in the case of using positive photosensitive acrylic as a material of theinsulator 1725, theinsulator 1725 is preferably formed to have a curved surface with a curvature radius (0.2 μm to 3 μm) only at an upper end. Either a negative resist which becomes insoluble in an etchant by light irradiation or a positive resist which becomes soluble in an etchant by light irradiation can be used as theinsulator 1725. Further, an inorganic material such as silicon oxide or silicon oxynitride as well as an organic material can be used as a material of theinsulator 1725. - Next, a
layer 1726 containing a light emitting substance and anopposite electrode 1727 are formed over thepixel electrode 1724 and theinsulator 1725. - Note that a
light emitting element 1728 is formed in a region where thelayer 1726 containing a light emitting substance is sandwiched between thepixel electrode 1724 and theopposite electrode 1727. - Next, the detail of the
light emitting element 1728 is explained with reference toFIGS. 18A and 18B . Note that thepixel electrode 1724 and theopposite electrode 1727 inFIG. 17 correspond to apixel electrode 1801 and anopposite electrode 1802 inFIGS. 18A and 18B , respectively. InFIG. 18A , the pixel electrode is an anode and the opposite electrode is a cathode. - As shown in
FIG. 18A , ahole injection layer 1811, ahole transport layer 1812, anelectron transport layer 1814, anelectron injection layer 1815, and the like as well as alight emitting layer 1813 are provided between thepixel electrode 1801 and theopposite electrode 1802. These layers are stacked so that holes are injected from thepixel electrode 1801 side and electrons are injected from theopposite electrode 1802 side when applying a voltage to set a potential of thepixel electrode 1801 to be higher than a potential of theopposite electrode 1802. - In such a light emitting element, the holes injected from the
pixel electrode 1801 and the electrons injected from theopposite electrode 1802 are recombined in thelight emitting layer 1813 to excite a light emitting substance. Then, the excited light emitting substance emits light when returning to a ground state. Note that it is acceptable as long as the light emitting substance is a substance which can provide luminescence (electroluminescence). - There is no particular limitation on the substance for forming the
light emitting layer 1813, and the light emitting layer may be formed of only a light emitting substance. However, when concentration quenching occurs, the light emitting layer is preferably a layer formed using a substance (host) having a larger energy gap than that of the light emitting substance, in which the light emitting substance is mixed so as to be dispersed. This can prevent concentration quenching of the light emitting substance. Note that the energy gap refers to an energy difference between the lowest unoccupied molecular orbital (LUMO) level and the highest occupied molecular orbital (HOMO) level. - In addition, there is no particular limitation on the light emitting substance, and a substance which can emit light with a desired emission wavelength may be used. For example, in order to obtain red light emission, a substance which exhibits light emission having a peak of an emission spectrum at 600 nm to 680 nm can be used, such as 4-dicyanomethylene-2-isopropyl-6-[2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyljulolidine-9-yl)ethenyl]-4H-p yran (abbr.: DCJTI), 4-dicyanomethylene-2-methyl-6-[2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyljulolidine-9-yl)ethenyl]-4H-pyr an (abbr.: DCJT), 4-dicyanomethylene-2-tert-buytyl-6-[2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyljulolidine-9-yl)ethenyl]-4H-p yran (abbr.: DCJTB), periflanthene, or 2,5-dicyano-1,4-bis[2(10-methoxy-1,1,7,7-tetramethyljulolidine-9-yl)ethenyl]benzene. In order to obtain green light emission, a substance which exhibits light emission having a peak of an emission spectrum at 500 nm to 550 nm can be used, such as N,N′-dimethylquinacridon (abbr.: DMQd), coumarin 6, coumarin 545T, tris(8-quinolinolato)aluminum (abbr.: Alq), or N,N′-diphenylquinacridon (DPQd). In order to obtain blue light emission, a substance which exhibits light emission having a peak of an emission spectrum at 420 nm to 500 nm can be used, such as 9,10-bis(2-naphthyl)-tert-butylanthracene (abbr.: t-BuDNA), 9,9′-bianthryl, 9,10-diphenylanthracene (abbr.: DPA), 9,10-bis(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbr.: DNA), bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)-4-phenylphenolato-gallium (abbr.: BGaq), or bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)-4-phenylphenolato-aluminum (abbr.: BAlq).
- There is no particular limitation on the substance which is used for dispersing the light emitting substance, and for example, an anthracene derivative such as 9,10-di(2-naphthyl)-2-tert-butylanthracene (abbr.: t-BuDNA), a carbazole derivative such as 4,4′-bis(N-carbazolyl)biphenyl (abbr.: CBP), a metal complex such as bis[2-(2-hydroxphenyl)pyridinato]zinc (abbr.: Znpp2) or bis[2-(2-hydroxphenyl)benzoxazolato]zinc (abbr.: ZnBOX), or the like can be used.
- Although an anode material for forming the
pixel electrode 1801 is not particularly limited, a metal, an alloy, a conductive compound, a mixture thereof, or the like having a high work function (a work function of 4.0 eV or higher) is preferably used. As a specific example of such an anode material, oxide of a metal material such as indium tin oxide (abbr.: ITO), ITO containing silicon oxide, or indium zinc oxide (abbr.: IZO) formed using a target in which indium oxide is mixed with zinc oxide (ZnO) of 2 wt % to 20 wt % can be given. Further, gold (Au), platinum (Pt), nickel (Ni), tungsten (W), chromium (Cr), molybdenum (Mo), iron (Fe), cobalt (Co), copper (Cu), palladium (Pd), nitride of a metal material (for example, TiN), or the like can be given. - On the other hand, as a substance for forming the
opposite electrode 1802, a metal, an alloy, a conductive compound, a mixture thereof, or the like having a low work function (a work function of 3.8 eV or lower) can be used. As a specific example of such a cathode material, an element belonging toGroup opposite electrode 1802 and thelight emitting layer 1813 so as to be stacked with the opposite electrode, various conductive materials including the materials described as the material of thepixel electrode 1801 such as Al, Ag, ITO, or ITO containing silicon oxide can be used for theopposite electrode 1802 regardless of the magnitude of the work function. Alternatively, a similar effect can be obtained by forming theelectron injection layer 1815 to be described later using a material having a particularly excellent electron injecting function. - Note that in order to extract light emission to outside, it is preferable that either or both the
pixel electrode 1801 and theopposite electrode 1802 are transparent electrodes made of ITO or the like or are formed with a thickness of several to several tens nm so as to be able to transmit visible light. - The
hole transport layer 1812 is provided between thepixel electrode 1801 and thelight emitting layer 1813 as shown inFIG. 18A . The hole transport layer is a layer functioning to transport holes injected from thepixel electrode 1801 to thelight emitting layer 1813. By providing thehole transport layer 1812 and separating thepixel electrode 1801 and thelight emitting layer 1813 from each other, light emission can be prevented from being quenched due to metal. - Note that the
hole transport layer 1812 is preferably formed using a substance having an excellent hole transport property, and particularly, a substance having a hole mobility of 1×10−6 cm2/Vs or more. Note that the substance having an excellent hole transport property refers to a substance having a higher mobility of holes than that of electrons. As a specific example of a substance which can be used for forming thehole transport layer 1812, 4,4′-bis[N-(1-naphtkyl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbr.: NPB), 4,4′-bis[N-(3-methylphenyl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbr.: TPD), 4,4′,4″-tris(N,N-diphenylamino)triphenylamine (abbr.: TDATA), 4,4′,4″-tris[N-(3methylphenyl)-N-phenylamino]triphenylamine (abbr.: MTDATA), 4,4′-bis{N-[4-(N,N-di-m-tolylamino)phenyl]-N-phenylamino}biphenyl (abbr.: DNTPD), 1,3,5-tris[N,N-di(m-toly)amino]benzene (abbr.: m-MTDAB), 4,4′,4″-tris(N-carbazolyl)triphenylamine (abbr.: TCTA), phthalocyanine (abbr.: H2Pc), copper phthalocyanine (abbr.: CuPc), vanadyl phthalocyanine (abbr.: VOPc), or the like can be given. In addition, thehole transport layer 1812 may be a layer having a multilayer structure which is formed by combining two or more layers formed of the above-described substances. - Further, the
electron transport layer 1814 may be provided between theopposite electrode 1802 and thelight emitting layer 1813 as shown inFIG. 18A . Here, the electron transport layer is a layer functioning to transport electrons injected from theopposite electrode 1802 to thelight emitting layer 1813. By providing theelectron transport layer 1814 and separating theopposite electrode 1802 and thelight emitting layer 1813 from each other, light emission can be prevented from being quenched due to metal. - There is no particular limitation on the material of the
electron transport layer 1814, and theelectron transport layer 1814 can be formed of a metal complex having a quinoline skeleton or a benzoquinoline skeleton such as tris(8-quinolinolato)aluminum (abbr.: Alq), tris(5-methyl-8-quinolinolato)aluminum (abbr.: Almq3), bis(10-hydroxybenzo[h]-quinolinolato)beryllium (abbr.: BeBq2), or bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)-4-phenylphenolato-aluminum (abbr.: BAlq), or the like. Alternatively, it may be formed of a metal complex having an oxazole-based or thiazole-based ligand such as bis[2-(2-hydroxyphenyl)benzoxazolato]zinc (abbr.: Zn(BOX)2) or bis[2-(2-hydroxyphenyl)benzoxazolato]zinc (abbr.: Zn(BTZ)2), or the like. Further, it may be formed using 2-(4-biphenylyl)-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole (abbr.: PBD), 1,3-bis[5-(p-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl]benzene (abbr.: OXD-7), 3-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-4-phenyl-5-(4-biphenylyl)-1,2,4-triazole (abbr.: TAZ), 3-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-4-(4-ethylphenyl)-5-(4-biphenylyl)-1,2,4-triazole (abbr.: p-EtTAZ), bathophenanthroline (abbr.: BPhen), bathocuproin (abbr.: BCP), or the like. Theelectron transport layer 1814 is preferably formed using a substance having a higher mobility of electrons than that of holes as described above. In addition, theelectron transport layer 1814 is preferably formed using a substance having an electron mobility of 10−6 cm2 Vs or more. Note that theelectron transport layer 1814 may be a layer having a multilayer structure which is formed by combining two or more layers formed of the above-described substances. - Moreover, the
hole injection layer 1811 may be provided between thepixel electrode 1801 and thehole transport layer 1812 as shown inFIG. 18A . Here, the hole injection layer refers to a layer functioning to promote hole injection from an electrode functioning as an anode to thehole transport layer 1812. - There is no particular limitation on the material of the
hole injection layer 1811, and thehole injection layer 1811 can be formed of metal oxide such as molybdenum oxide (MoOX), vanadium oxide (VOX), ruthenium oxide (RuOX), tungsten oxide (WOX), or manganese oxide (MnOX). Alternatively, thehole injection layer 1811 can be formed of a phthalocyanine-based compound such as phthalocyanine (abbr.: H2Pc) or copper phthalocyanine (CuPc), an aromatic amine-based compound such as 4,4-bis{N-[4-(N,N-di-m-tolyamino)phenyl]-N-phenylamino}biphenyl (abbr.: DNTPD), a high molecular compound such as a poly(ethylene dioxythiophene)/poly(styrenesulfonic acid) aqueous solution (PEDOT/PSS), or the like. - In addition, a mixture of the metal oxide and a substance having an excellent hole transport property may be provided between the
pixel electrode 1801 and thehole transport layer 1812. Since such a layer does not cause an increase in drive voltage even when thickened, optical design using a microcavity effect or a light interference effect can be performed by adjusting the thickness of the layer. Therefore, a high-quality light emitting element with excellent color purity and few color changes depending on a viewing angle can be manufactured. In addition, a film thickness can be set so as to prevent short circuit of thepixel electrode 1801 and theopposite electrode 1802 due to the influence of unevenness generated at the time of film formation on the surface of thepixel electrode 1801 and minute residue remaining on the surface of the electrode. - In addition, the
electron injection layer 1815 may be provided between theopposite electrode 1802 and theelectron transport layer 1814 as shown inFIG. 18A . Here, the electron injection layer is a layer functioning to promote electron injection from an electrode functioning as a cathode to theelectron transport layer 1814. Note that when the electron transport layer is not particularly provided, electron injection to the light emitting layer may be supported by providing the electron injection layer between the electrode functioning as a cathode and the light emitting layer. - There is no particular limitation on the material of the
electron injection layer 1815, and theelectron injection layer 1815 can be formed using a compound of alkali metal or alkaline earth metal, such as lithium fluoride (LiF), cesium fluoride (CsF), or calcium fluoride (CaF2). Alternatively, a mixture of a substance having an excellent electron transport property such as Alq or 4,4-bis(5-methylbenzoxazol-2-yl)stilbene (BzOs) and alkali metal or alkaline earth metal such as magnesium or lithium can be used for theelectron injection layer 1815. - Note that each of the
hole injection layer 1811, thehole transport layer 1812, thelight emitting layer 1813, theelectron transport layer 1814, and theelectron injection layer 1815 may be formed by any method such as an evaporation method, an ink-jet method, or a coating method. In addition, thepixel electrode 1801 or theopposite electrode 1802 may also be formed using any method such as a sputtering method or an evaporation method. - In addition, a layer structure of a light emitting element is not limited to that shown in
FIG. 18A , and may be manufactured by forming layers sequentially from an electrode serving as a cathode as shown inFIG. 18B . In other words, thepixel electrode 1801 may be a cathode, and theelectron injection layer 1815, theelectron transport layer 1814, thelight emitting layer 1813, thehole transport layer 1812, thehole injection layer 1811, and theopposite electrode 1802 may be stacked in this order over thepixel electrode 1801. Note that theopposite electrode 1802 functions as an anode. - Note that the light emitting element is described to have a single light emitting layer; however, the light emitting element may include a plurality of light emitting layers. White light can be obtained by providing a plurality of light emitting layers and mixing light emissions from the respective light emitting layers. For example, in the case of a light emitting element including two light emitting layers, a spacing layer, and a layer which generates holes and a layer which generates electrons are preferably provided between a first light emitting layer and a second light emitting layer. This structure enables the light emitted from the respective light emitting layers to outside to be visually mixed and perceived as white light. Thus, white light can be obtained.
- Light emission is extracted to outside through either or both the
pixel electrode 1724 and theopposite electrode 1727 inFIG. 17 . Accordingly, either or both thepixel electrode 1724 and theopposite electrode 1727 are formed of a light-transmitting substance. - When only the
opposite electrode 1727 is formed of a light-transmitting substance, light emission is extracted from a side opposite to the substrate through theopposite electrode 1727 as shown inFIG. 19A . When only thepixel electrode 1724 is formed of a light-transmitting substance, light emission is extracted from the substrate side through thepixel electrode 1724 as shown inFIG. 19B . When both thepixel electrode 1724 and theopposite electrode 1727 are formed of a light-transmitting substance, light emission is extracted from both the substrate side and the opposite side through thepixel electrode 1724 and theopposite electrode 1727 as shown inFIG. 19C . - Next, a transistor having a staggered structure using a non-crystalline semiconductor film for the semiconductor layer of the
transistor 1713 is explained. Fragmentary sectional views of pixels are shown inFIGS. 20A and 20B . Note that in each ofFIGS. 20A and 20B , a transistor having a staggered structure is shown and a capacitor included in a pixel is also explained. - As shown in
FIG. 20A , abase film 2012 is formed over asubstrate 2011. Further, apixel electrode 2013 is formed over thebase film 2012. In addition, afirst electrode 2014 is formed of the same material and in the same layer as thepixel electrode 2013. - Further, a
wiring 2015 and awiring 2016 are formed over thebase film 2012, and an end of thepixel electrode 2013 is covered with thewiring 2015. An n-type semiconductor layer 2017 and an n-type semiconductor layer 2018 each having n-type conductivity are formed over thewiring 2015 and thewiring 2016. In addition, asemiconductor layer 2019 is formed over thebase film 2012 and between thewiring 2015 and thewiring 2016. A part of thesemiconductor layer 2019 is extended so as to overlap with the n-type semiconductor layer 2017 and the n-type semiconductor layer 2018. Note that this semiconductor layer is formed of a non-crystalline semiconductor film made of an amorphous semiconductor such as amorphous silicon (a-Si:H), a semi-amorphous semiconductor, a microcrystalline semiconductor, or the like. In addition, agate insulating film 2020 is formed over thesemiconductor layer 2019. An insulatingfilm 2021 made of the same material and in the same layer as thegate insulating film 2020 is also formed over thefirst electrode 2014. - Furthermore, a
gate electrode 2022 is formed over thegate insulating film 2020; thus, atransistor 2025 is formed. In addition, asecond electrode 2023 made of the same material and in the same layer as thegate electrode 2022 is formed over thefirst electrode 2014 with the insulatingfilm 2021 interposed therebetween, and acapacitor 2024 is formed in which the insulatingfilm 2021 is sandwiched between thefirst electrode 2014 and thesecond electrode 2023. An interlayer insulatingfilm 2026 is formed to cover the end of thepixel electrode 2013, thetransistor 2025, and thecapacitor 2024. - A
layer 2027 containing a light emitting substance and anopposite electrode 2028 are formed over theinterlayer insulating film 2026 and thepixel electrode 2013 located in an opening of theinterlayer insulating film 2026, and alight emitting element 2029 is formed in a region where thelayer 2027 containing a light emitting substance is sandwiched between thepixel electrode 2013 and theopposite electrode 2028. - The
first electrode 2014 shown inFIG. 20A may be formed of the same material and in the same layer as thewirings FIG. 20B , and acapacitor 2031 may be formed in which the insulatingfilm 2021 is sandwiched between thefirst electrode 2030 and thesecond electrode 2023. Although an n-channel transistor is used as thetransistor 2025 inFIGS. 20A and 20B , a p-channel transistor may be used. - Materials of the
substrate 2011, thebase film 2012, thepixel electrode 2013, thegate insulating film 2020, thegate electrode 2022, theinterlayer insulating film 2026, thelayer 2027 containing a light emitting substance, and theopposite electrode 2028 may be similar to those of thesubstrate 1711, the base film 1712, thepixel electrode 1724, thegate insulating film 1715, thegate electrode 1716, theinterlayer insulating films layer 1726 containing a light emitting substance, and theopposite electrode 1727 shown inFIG. 17 . Thewiring 2015 and thewiring 2016 may be formed using similar materials to those of the source anddrain electrodes 1723 inFIG. 17 . - Next, fragmentary sectional views of pixels each having a transistor with a structure in which a gate electrode is sandwiched between a substrate and a semiconductor layer, in other words, a bottom-gate transistor in which a gate electrode is located below a semiconductor layer are shown in
FIGS. 21A and 21B as other structures of a transistor using a non-crystalline semiconductor film for a semiconductor layer. - A
base film 2112 is formed over asubstrate 2111. Agate electrode 2113 is formed over thebase film 2112. In addition, afirst electrode 2114 is formed of the same material and in the same layer as thegate electrode 2113. A material of thegate electrode 2113 may be polycrystalline silicon to which phosphorus is added or silicide that is a compound of metal and silicon as well as the material used for thegate electrode 1716 shown inFIG. 17 . - A
gate insulating film 2115 is formed to cover thegate electrode 2113 and thefirst electrode 2114. - A
semiconductor layer 2116 is formed over thegate insulating film 2115. Asemiconductor layer 2117 made of the same material and in the same layer as thesemiconductor layer 2116 is formed over thefirst electrode 2114. Note that this semiconductor layer is formed of a non-crystalline semiconductor film made of an amorphous semiconductor such as amorphous silicon (a-Si:H), a semi-amorphous semiconductor, a microcrystalline semiconductor, or the like. - An n-
type semiconductor layer 2118 and an n-type semiconductor layer 2119 each having n-type conductivity are formed over thesemiconductor layer 2116, and an n-type semiconductor layer 2120 is formed over thesemiconductor layer 2117. - A
wiring 2121 and awiring 2122 are formed over the n-type semiconductor layer 2118 and the n-type semiconductor layer 2119, respectively, and atransistor 2129 is formed. Aconductive layer 2123 made of the same material and in the same layer as thewiring 2121 and thewiring 2122 is formed over the n-type semiconductor layer 2120, and thisconductive layer 2123, the n-type semiconductor layer 2120, and thesemiconductor layer 2117 form a second electrode. Note that acapacitor 2130 is formed in which thegate insulating film 2115 is sandwiched between this second electrode and thefirst electrode 2114. - One end of the
wiring 2121 is extended, and apixel electrode 2124 is formed on the extended portion of thewiring 2121. - An
insulator 2125 is formed to cover an end of thepixel electrode 2124, thetransistor 2129, and thecapacitor 2130. - A
layer 2126 containing a light emitting substance and anopposite electrode 2127 are formed over thepixel electrode 2124 and theinsulator 2125, and alight emitting element 2128 is formed in a region where thelayer 2126 containing a light emitting substance is sandwiched between thepixel electrode 2124 and theopposite electrode 2127. - The
semiconductor layer 2117 and the n-type semiconductor layer 2120 which serve as a part of the second electrode of thecapacitor 2130 do not particularly need to be provided. In other words, a capacitor may be formed in which theconductive layer 2123 is used as the second electrode and thegate insulating film 2115 is sandwiched between thefirst electrode 2114 and theconductive layer 2123. - Although an n-channel transistor is used as the
transistor 2129, a p-channel transistor may be used. - Note that a
capacitor 2132 having a structure in which thegate insulating film 2115 is sandwiched between thefirst electrode 2114 and asecond electrode 2131 made of the same material and in the same layer as thepixel electrode 2124 as shown inFIG. 21B can also be formed by forming thepixel electrode 2124 before forming thewiring 2121 inFIG. 21A . - Although an inverted staggered transistor with a channel etch structure is described, it goes without saying that a transistor with a channel protective structure may be used. Next, the case of a transistor with a channel protective structure is explained with reference to
FIGS. 22A and 22B . Note that a common reference numeral is used inFIGS. 22A and 22B to denote a similar component to that inFIGS. 21A and 21B . - A
transistor 2201 with a channel protective structure shown inFIG. 22A is different from thetransistor 2129 with a channel etch structure shown inFIG. 21A in that aninsulator 2202 serving as an etching mask is provided over a region of thesemiconductor layer 2116 in which a channel is formed. - Similarly, a
transistor 2201 with a channel protective structure shown inFIG. 22B is different from thetransistor 2129 with a channel etch structure shown inFIG. 21B in that aninsulator 2202 serving as an etching mask is provided over a region of thesemiconductor layer 2116 in which a channel is formed. - Manufacturing cost can be reduced by using a non-cyrstalline semiconductor film for a semiconductor layer of a transistor included in the pixel of the present invention. Note that the materials explained with reference to
FIG. 17 can be used as respective materials. - Structures of a transistor and a capacitor are not limited to those described above, and transistors and capacitors having various structures can be used.
- A crystalline semiconductor film made of polysilicon (p-Si:H) or the like as well as a non-crystalline semiconductor film made of an amorphous semiconductor such as amorphous silicon (a-Si:H), a semi-amorphous semiconductor, a microcrystalline semiconductor, or the like may be used for a semiconductor layer of a transistor.
-
FIG. 23 shows a fragmentary sectional view of a pixel including a transistor using a crystalline semiconductor film for a semiconductor layer, which is explained below. Note that atransistor 2318 shown inFIG. 23 is the multi-gate transistor shown inFIG. 10 . - As shown in
FIG. 23 , abase film 2302 is formed over asubstrate 2301, and asemiconductor layer 2303 is formed thereover. Note that thesemiconductor layer 2303 is formed by patterning a crystalline semiconductor film into a desired shape. - An example of a method for manufacturing the crystalline semiconductor film is described below. First, an amorphous silicon film is formed over the
substrate 2301 by a sputtering method, a CVD method, or the like. A film formation material does not need to be limited to an amorphous silicon film, and a non-crystalline semiconductor film made of an amorphous semiconductor, a semi-amorphous semiconductor, a microcrystalline semiconductor, or the like is acceptable. In addition, a compound semiconductor film having an amorphous structure such as an amorphous silicon germanium film may be used. - Then, the amorphous silicon film obtained is crystallized using a thermal crystallization method, a laser crystallization method, a thermal crystallization method using a catalytic element such as nickel, or the like, thereby obtaining a crystalline semiconductor film. Note that crystallization may be performed by a combination of these crystallization methods.
- In the case of forming a crystalline semiconductor film by a thermal crystallization method, a heating furnace, laser irradiation, RTA (Rapid Thermal Annealing), or a combination thereof can be used.
- When the crystalline semiconductor film is formed by a laser crystallization method, a continuous wave laser beam (CW laser beam) or a pulsed laser beam can be used. As a laser beam that can be used here, a laser beam emitted from one or more kinds of a gas laser such as an Ar laser, a Kr laser, or an excimer laser; a laser using, as a medium, single-crystal YAG, YVO4, forsterite (Mg2SiO4), YAlO3, or GdVO4, or polycrystalline (ceramic) YAG, Y2O3, YVO4, YAlO3, or GdVO4 doped with one or more of Nd, Yb, Cr, Ti, Ho, Er, Tm, and Ta as a dopant; a glass laser; a ruby laser; an alexandrite laser; a Ti:sapphire laser; a copper vapor laser; and a gold vapor laser can be used. A crystal having a large grain diameter can be obtained by irradiation with the fundamental wave of the above laser beam or a second harmonic to a fourth harmonic of the laser beam. For example, the second harmonic (532 nm) or the third harmonic (355 nm) of a Nd:YVO4 laser (the fundamental wave: 1064 nm) can be used. At this time, an energy density of the laser is required to be about 0.01 MW/cm2 to 100 MW/cm2 (preferably, 0.1 MW/cm2 to 10 MW/cm2). A scanning rate is set to about 10 cm/sec to 2000 cm/sec for irradiation.
- Note that a laser using, as a medium, single-crystal YAG, YVO4, forsterite (Mg2SiO4), YAlO3, or GdVO4, or polycrystalline (ceramic) YAG, Y2O3, YVO4, YAIO3, GdVO4 doped with one or more of Nd, Yb, Cr, Ti, Ho, Er, Tm, and Ta as a dopant; an Ar ion laser; or a Ti: sapphire laser can be a CW laser. Alternatively, it can be pulsed at a repetition rate of 10 MHz or more by performing Q-switch operation, mode locking, or the like. When a laser beam is pulsed at a repetition rate of 10 MHz or more, the semiconductor film is irradiated with the following pulsed laser after being melted by a preceding laser and before being solidified. Therefore, unlike the case of using a pulsed laser having a low repetition rate, the interface between the solid phase and the liquid phase can be moved continuously in the semiconductor film, so that crystal grains grown continuously in the scanning direction can be obtained.
- In the case of forming a crystalline semiconductor film by a thermal crystallization method using a catalytic element such as nickel, it is preferable to perform gettering treatment for removing the catalytic element such as nickel after crystallization.
- By the above-described crystallization, a crystallized region is formed in a part of the amorphous semiconductor film. This partly crystallized crystalline semiconductor film is patterned into a desired shape, thereby forming an island-shaped semiconductor film. This semiconductor film is used for the
semiconductor layer 2303 of the transistor. - The crystalline semiconductor layer is used for a
channel formation region 2304 and animpurity region 2305 serving as a source region or a drain region of thetransistor 2318 and also for asemiconductor layer 2306 and animpurity region 2308 serving as a lower electrode of acapacitor 2319. Note that theimpurity region 2308 does not particularly need to be provided. Channel doping may be performed to thechannel formation region 2304 and thesemiconductor layer 2306. - Next, a
gate insulating film 2309 is formed over thesemiconductor layer 2303 and the lower electrode of thecapacitor 2319. Further, agate electrode 2310 is formed over thesemiconductor layer 2303 with thegate insulating film 2309 interposed therebetween, and anupper electrode 2311 made of the same material and in the same layer as thegate electrode 2310 is formed over thesemiconductor layer 2306 of thecapacitor 2319 with thegate insulating film 2309 interposed therebetween. In this manner, thetransistor 2318 and thecapacitor 2319 are manufactured. - Next, an
interlayer insulating film 2312 is formed to cover thetransistor 2318 and thecapacitor 2319, and awiring 2313 is formed over theinterlayer insulating film 2312 so as to be in contact with theimpurity region 2305 through a contact hole. Then, apixel electrode 2314 is formed in contact with thewiring 2313 and over theinterlayer insulating film 2312, and aninsulator 2315 is formed to cover an end of thepixel electrode 2314 and thewiring 2313. Further, alayer 2316 containing a light emitting substance and anopposite electrode 2317 are formed over thepixel electrode 2314, and alight emitting element 2320 is formed in a region where thelayer 2316 containing a light emitting substance is sandwiched between thepixel electrode 2314 and theopposite electrode 2317. - A fragmentary cross section of a pixel including a bottom-gate transistor using a crystalline semiconductor film made of polysilicon (p-Si:H) or the like for a semiconductor layer is shown in
FIG. 24 . - A
base film 2402 is formed over asubstrate 2401, and agate electrode 2403 is formed thereover. In addition, afirst electrode 2404 of acapacitor 2423 is formed of the same material and in the same layer as thegate electrode 2403. - A
gate insulating film 2405 is formed to cover thegate electrode 2403 and thefirst electrode 2404. - A semiconductor layer is formed over the
gate insulating film 2405. Note that the semiconductor layer is formed by crystallizing a non-crystalline semiconductor film made of an amorphous semiconductor, a semi-amorphous semiconductor, a microcrystalline semiconductor, or the like using a thermal crystallization method, a laser crystallization method, a thermal crystallization method using a catalytic element such as nickel, or the like and patterning the crystallized semiconductor film into a desired shape. - Note that a
channel formation region 2406, anLDD region 2407, and animpurity region 2408 serving as a source region or a drain region of atransistor 2422, and aregion 2409 serving as a second electrode, andimpurity regions capacitor 2423 are formed using the semiconductor layer. Note that theimpurity regions channel formation region 2406 and theregion 2409. - Note that the
capacitor 2423 has a structure in which thegate insulating film 2405 is sandwiched between thefirst electrode 2404 and the second electrode including theregion 2409 formed of the semiconductor layer and the like. - Next, a first
interlayer insulating film 2412 is formed to cover the semiconductor layer, and awiring 2413 is formed over the firstinterlayer insulating film 2412 so as to be in contact with theimpurity region 2408 through a contact hole. - An
opening 2415 is formed in the firstinterlayer insulating film 2412. A secondinterlayer insulating film 2416 is formed to cover thetransistor 2422, thecapacitor 2423, and theopening 2415, and apixel electrode 2417 is formed over the secondinterlayer insulating film 2416 so as to be connected to thewiring 2413 through a contact hole. In addition, aninsulator 2418 is formed to cover an end of thepixel electrode 2417. Then, alayer 2419 containing a light emitting substance and anopposite electrode 2420 are formed over thepixel electrode 2417, and alight emitting element 2421 is formed in a region where thelayer 2419 containing a light emitting substance is sandwiched between thepixel electrode 2417 and theopposite electrode 2420. Note that theopening 2415 is located below thelight emitting element 2421. In other words, since the firstinterlayer insulating film 2412 has theopening 2415, transmittance can be increased when light emission from thelight emitting element 2421 is extracted from the substrate side. - By using a crystalline semiconductor film for a semiconductor layer of a transistor included in the pixel of the present invention, it becomes easier to form the scan
line driver circuit 612 and the signalline driver circuit 611 inFIG. 6 over the same substrate as thepixel portion 613, for example. - Note that a structure of a transistor using a crystalline semiconductor film for a semiconductor layer is not limited to that described above, and the transistor can have various structures. Note that the same applies to a capacitor. In this embodiment mode, the materials in
FIG. 17 can be appropriately used unless stated otherwise. - The transistor described in this embodiment mode can be used as the transistor which controls a current value supplied to the light emitting element in the pixel described in any of
Embodiment Modes 1 to 7. Therefore, variation in current value caused by variation in threshold voltage of the transistor can be suppressed by operating the pixel as described in any ofEmbodiment Modes 1 to 7. Accordingly, current in accordance with luminance data can be supplied to a light emitting element, and variation in luminance can be suppressed. In addition, power consumption can be reduced because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. - In addition, since each pixel can emit light except in its address period by applying such a pixel to the display device of
FIG. 6 , a ratio of a light emitting period to one frame period (that is, a duty ratio) can be significantly high and can be approximately 100%. Therefore, a display device with less luminance variation and a high duty ratio can be provided. - In addition, since a threshold write period can be set to be long, a threshold voltage of a transistor which controls a current value flowing to a light emitting element can be written into a capacitor more accurately. Therefore, reliability as a display device is improved.
- In this embodiment mode, one mode of a display device of the present invention is explained with reference to
FIGS. 25A and 25B . -
FIG. 25A is a top view showing a display device, andFIG. 25B is an A-A′ line cross sectional view (cross sectional view taken along a line A-A′) ofFIG. 25A . The display device includes a signalline driver circuit 2501, apixel portion 2502, a first scanline driver circuit 2503, and a second scanline driver circuit 2506 over asubstrate 2510 which are indicated by dotted lines in the drawing. The display device also includes a sealingsubstrate 2504 and asealant 2505, and a portion of the display device surrounded by them is aspace 2507. - Note that a
wiring 2508 is a wiring for transmitting signals to be inputted to the first scanline driver circuit 2503, the second scanline driver circuit 2506, and the signalline driver circuit 2501 and receives a video signal, a clock signal, a start signal, and the like through an FPC (Flexible Printed Circuit) 2509 that serves as an external input terminal. IC chips (semiconductor chips provided with a memory circuit, a buffer circuit, and the like) 2518 and 2519 are mounted by COG (Chip On Glass) or the like on a connection portion of theFPC 2509 and the display device. Note that only the FPC is shown here, but a printed wiring board (PWB) may be attached to the FPC. The display device of the present invention includes not only a main body of a display device but also a display device with an FPC or a PWB attached thereto. In addition, it also includes a display device on which an IC chip or the like is mounted. - A cross-sectional structure is explained with reference to
FIG. 25B . Thepixel portion 2502 and its peripheral driver circuits (the first scanline driver circuit 2503, the second scanline driver circuit 2506, and the signal line driver circuit 2501 ) are formed over thesubstrate 2510; here, the signalline driver circuit 2501 and thepixel portion 2502 are shown. - Note that the signal
line driver circuit 2501 includes transistors with single polarity such as n-channel transistors - The pixel described in any of
Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for thepixel portion 2502. Note thatFIG. 25B shows atransistor 2511 which functions as a switch, atransistor 2512 which controls a current value supplied to a light emitting element, and alight emitting element 2528. Note that a first electrode of thetransistor 2512 is connected to apixel electrode 2513 of thelight emitting element 2528. In addition, aninsulator 2514 is formed to cover an end of thepixel electrode 2513. Here, theinsulator 2514 is formed using a positive photosensitive acrylic resin film. - The
insulator 2514 is formed to have a curved surface with a curvature at an upper end portion or a lower end portion thereof in order to obtain favorable coverage. For example, in the case of using positive photosensitive acrylic as a material of theinsulator 2514, theinsulator 2514 is preferably formed to have a curved surface with a curvature radius (0.2 μm to 3 μm) only at the upper end portion. Either a negative resist which becomes insoluble in an etchant by light irradiation or a positive resist which becomes soluble in an etchant by light irradiation can be used as theinsulator 2514. - A
layer 2516 containing a light emitting substance and anopposite electrode 2517 are formed over thepixel electrode 2513. As long as thelayer 2516 containing a light emitting substance is provided with at least a light emitting layer, there is no particular limitation on layers other than the light emitting layer, which can be appropriately selected. - By attaching the sealing
substrate 2504 to thesubstrate 2510 using thesealant 2505, a structure is obtained in which thelight emitting element 2528 is provided in thespace 2507 surrounded by thesubstrate 2510, the sealingsubstrate 2504, and thesealant 2505. Note that there is also a case where thespace 2507 is filled with thesealant 2505 other than an inert gas (such as nitrogen or argon). - Note that an epoxy-based resin is preferably used as the
sealant 2505. The material preferably allows as little moisture and oxygen as possible to penetrate. As the sealingsubstrate 2504, a plastic substrate formed of FRP (Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastics), PVF (polyvinyl fluoride), Mylar, polyester, acrylic, or the like can be used other than a glass substrate or a quartz substrate. - Variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed by using and operating any of the pixels described in
Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 for thepixel portion 2502, and thus a display device with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained. In addition, power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with the opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. - By forming the signal
line driver circuit 2501, thepixel portion 2502, the first scanline driver circuit 2503, and the second scanline driver circuit 2506 over the same substrate as shown inFIGS. 25A and 25B , cost of the display device can be reduced. In this case, a manufacturing process can be simplified by using transistors with single polarity for the signalline driver circuit 2501, thepixel portion 2502, the first scanline driver circuit 2503, and the second scanline driver circuit 2506. Accordingly, a further cost reduction can be achieved. - The display device of the present invention can be obtained as described above. Note that the above-described structure is one example and a structure of the display device of the present invention is not limited to this.
- Note that the structure of the display device may be that in which a signal
line driver circuit 2601 is formed on an IC chip and the IC chip is mounted on a display device by COG or the like as shown inFIG. 26A . Note that asubstrate 2600, apixel portion 2602, a first scanline driver circuit 2603, a second scanline driver circuit 2604, anFPC 2605, anIC chip 2606, anIC chip 2607, a sealingsubstrate 2608, and asealant 2609 ofFIG. 26A correspond to thesubstrate 2510, thepixel portion 2502, the first scanline driver circuit 2503, the second scanline driver circuit 2506, theFPC 2509, theIC chip 2518, theIC chip 2519, the sealingsubstrate 2504, and thesealant 2505 inFIG. 25A , respectively. - In other words, only a signal line driver circuit of which high speed operation is required is formed on an IC chip using a CMOS or the like to reduce power consumption. In addition, higher-speed operation and lower power consumption can be achieved by using a semiconductor chip made of a silicon wafer or the like as the IC chip.
- Note that cost reduction can be achieved by forming the first scan
line driver circuit 2603 and the second scanline driver circuit 2604 over the same substrate as thepixel portion 2602. A further cost reduction can be achieved by forming the first scanline driver circuit 2603, the second scanline driver circuit 2604, and thepixel portion 2602 using transistors with single polarity. At the time, a decrease in output potential can be prevented by using boot trap circuits for the first scanline driver circuit 2603 and the second scanline driver circuit 2604. In addition, in the case of using amorphous silicon for semiconductor layers of transistors included in the first scanline driver circuit 2603 and the second scanline driver circuit 2604, the threshold voltage of each transistor varies due to deterioration. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a function to correct the variation. - Variations in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed by using and operating any of the pixels described in
Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 for thepixel portion 2602, and thus, a display device with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained. In addition, power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. In addition, a substrate area can be used efficiently by mounting an IC chip provided with a functional circuit (a memory or a buffer) on a connection portion of theFPC 2605 and thesubstrate 2600. - In addition, a structure may be employed in which a signal
line driver circuit 2611, a first scanline driver circuit 2613, and a second scanline driver circuit 2614 corresponding to the signalline driver circuit 2501, the first scanline driver circuit 2503, and the second scanline driver circuit 2506 ofFIG. 25A are formed on IC chips and the IC chips are mounted on a display device by COG or the like as shown inFIG. 26B . Note that asubstrate 2610, apixel portion 2612, anFPC 2615, anIC chip 2616, anIC chip 2617, a sealingsubstrate 2618, and asealant 2619 ofFIG. 26B correspond to thesubstrate 2510, thepixel portion 2502, theFPC 2509, theIC chip 2518, theIC chip 2519, the sealingsubstrate 2504, and thesealant 2505 ofFIG. 25A , respectively. - Cost reduction can be achieved by using a non-crystalline semiconductor film, for example, an amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) film for the semiconductor layer of the transistor of the
pixel portion 2612. Further, a large-sized display panel can also be manufactured. - Further, the first scan line driver circuit, the second scan line driver circuit, and the signal line driver circuit are not necessarily provided in a row direction and a column direction of the pixels. For example, a
peripheral driver circuit 2701 formed on an IC chip as shown inFIG. 27A may have functions of the first scanline driver circuit 2613, the second scanline driver circuit 2614, and the signalline driver circuit 2611 shown inFIG. 26B . Note that asubstrate 2700, apixel portion 2702, anFPC 2704, anIC chip 2705, anIC chip 2706, a sealingsubstrate 2707, and asealant 2708 ofFIG. 27A correspond to thesubstrate 2510, thepixel portion 2502, theFPC 2509, theIC chip 2518, theIC chip 2519, the sealingsubstrate 2504, and thesealant 2505 ofFIG. 25A , respectively. - Note that a schematic diagram illustrating the connection of wirings of the display device of
FIG. 27A is shown inFIG. 27B .FIG. 27B shows asubstrate 2710, aperipheral driver circuit 2711, apixel portion 2712, anFPC 2713, and anFPC 2714. - The
FPC 2713 and theFPC 2714 input a signal and a power supply potential from outside to theperipheral driver circuit 2711. Then, an output from theperipheral driver circuit 2711 is inputted to wirings in a row direction and a column direction connected to pixels included in thepixel portion 2712. - In addition, in the case of using a white light emitting element as the light emitting element, full color display can be realized by providing the sealing substrate with color filters. The present invention can be applied to such a display device.
FIG. 28 shows an example of a fragmentary sectional view of a pixel portion. - As shown in
FIG. 28 , abase film 2802 is formed over asubstrate 2800; atransistor 2801 which controls a current value supplied to a light emitting element is formed thereover; and apixel electrode 2803 is formed in contact with a first electrode of thetransistor 2801. Alayer 2804 containing a light emitting substance and anopposite electrode 2805 are formed thereover. - Note that a portion where the
layer 2804 containing a light emitting substance is sandwiched between thepixel electrode 2803 and theopposite electrode 2805 serves as the light emitting element. Note that white light is emitted inFIG. 28 . Ared color filter 2806R, agreen color filter 2806G, and ablue color filter 2806B are provided above the light emitting elements respectively to achieve full-color display. In addition, a black matrix (also referred to as a “BM”) 2807 is provided to separate these color filters. - The display device of this embodiment mode can be appropriately combined with the structure described in Embodiment Mode 8 as well as those in
Embodiment Modes 1 to 7. In addition, a structure of a display device is not limited to that described above, and the present invention can also be applied to a display device having another structure. - The display device of the present invention can be applied to various electronic devices. Specifically, it can be applied to a display portion of an electronic device. Note that examples of electronic devices are as follows: a camera such as a video camera or a digital camera, a goggle type display, a navigation system, an audio-reproducing device (car audio, an audio component, or the like), a computer, a game machine, a portable information terminal (a mobile computer, a mobile phone, a mobile game machine, an electronic book, or the like), an image-reproducing device having a recording medium (specifically, a device for reproducing a recording medium such as a digital versatile disc (DVD) and having a display for displaying the reproduced image), and the like.
-
FIG. 33A shows a display, which includes achassis 3301, asupport 3302, a display portion 3303, aspeaker portion 3304, avideo input terminal 3305, and the like. - Note that the pixel described in any of
Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for the display portion 3303. According to the present invention, variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and a display including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained. In addition, power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. Note that the display includes in its category all display devices used for displaying information, for example, for a personal computer, for TV broadcast reception, for advertisement display, or the like. - Note that while needs for an increase in display size have been increasing, an increase in price associated with the increase in display size has become an issue. Therefore, it is an essential task to reduce manufacturing cost and set the price of a high-quality product as low as possible.
- Since the pixel of the present invention can be manufactured using transistors with single polarity, the number of steps can be reduced and manufacturing cost can be reduced. A process can be simplified and a further cost reduction can be achieved by using a non-crystalline semiconductor film, for example, an amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) film for a semiconductor layer of each transistor included in the pixel. In this case, a driver circuit on the periphery of a pixel portion is preferably formed on an IC chip and the IC chip is mounted on a display panel by COG (Chip On Glass) or the like. Note that a signal line driver circuit with high operation speed may be formed on an IC chip, and a scan line driver circuit with relatively low operation speed may be formed using a circuit including transistors with single polarity over the same substrate as a pixel portion.
-
FIG. 33B shows a camera, which includes amain body 3311, adisplay portion 3312, animage receiving portion 3313, anoperation key 3314, anexternal connection port 3315, a shutter 3316, and the like. - Note that the pixel described in any of
Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for thedisplay portion 3312. According to the present invention, variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed, and a camera including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained. In addition, power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. - In addition, competitive manufacturing of a digital camera or the like has been intensified with an improvement in performance. Therefore, it is vital to set the price of a high-performance product as low as possible.
- Since the pixel of the present invention can be manufactured using transistors with single polarity, the number of steps can be reduced and manufacturing cost can be reduced. A process can be simplified and a further cost reduction can be achieved by using a non-crystalline semiconductor film, for example, an amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) film for a semiconductor layer of each transistor included in the pixel. In this case, a driver circuit on the periphery of a pixel portion is preferably formed on an IC chip and the IC chip is mounted on a display panel by COG or the like. Note that a signal line driver circuit with high operation speed may be formed on an IC chip, and a scan line driver circuit with relatively low operation speed may be formed using a circuit including transistors with single polarity over the same substrate as a pixel portion.
-
FIG. 33C shows a computer, which includes amain body 3321, achassis 3322, adisplay portion 3323, akeyboard 3324, anexternal connection port 3325, apointing mouse 3326, and the like. Note that the pixel described in any ofEmbodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for thedisplay portion 3323. According to the present invention, variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and a computer including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained. In addition, power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. A cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors. -
FIG. 33D shows a mobile computer, which includes amain body 3331, adisplay portion 3332, aswitch 3333, anoperation key 3334, aninfrared port 3335, and the like. Note that the pixel described in any ofEmbodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for thedisplay portion 3332. According to the present invention, variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and a mobile computer including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained. In addition, power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. A cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors. -
FIG. 33E shows a portable image reproducing device provided with a recording medium (specifically, a DVD player), which includes amain body 3341, achassis 3342, adisplay portion A 3343, adisplay portion B 3344, a recording medium (DVD or the like)reading portion 3345, anoperation key 3346, aspeaker portion 3347, and the like. Thedisplay portion A 3343 mainly displays image information, and thedisplay portion B 3344 mainly displays character information. Note that the pixel described in any ofEmbodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for thedisplay portion A 3343 and thedisplay portion B 3344. According to the present invention, variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and an image reproducing device including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained. In addition, power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. A cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors. -
FIG. 33F shows a goggle type display, which includes amain body 3351, adisplay portion 3352, anarm portion 3353, and the like. Note that the pixel described in any ofEmbodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for thedisplay portion 3352. According to the present invention, variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and a goggle type display including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained. In addition, power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. A cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors. -
FIG. 33G shows a video camera, which includes amain body 3361, adisplay portion 3362, achassis 3363, anexternal connection port 3364, a remotecontrol receiving portion 3365, animage receiving portion 3366, abattery 3367, anaudio input portion 3368, anoperation key 3369, aneye piece portion 3360, and the like. Note that the pixel described in any ofEmbodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for thedisplay portion 3362. According to the present invention, variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and a video camera including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained. In addition, power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. A cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors. -
FIG. 33H shows a mobile phone, which includes amain body 3371, achassis 3372, adisplay portion 3373, anaudio input portion 3374, anaudio output portion 3375, anoperation key 3376, anexternal connection port 3377, anantenna 3378, and the like. - Note that the pixel described in any of
Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for thedisplay portion 3373. According to the present invention, variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and a mobile phone including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained. - In addition, power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. A cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors.
- As described above, the present invention can be applied to all electronic devices.
- In this embodiment mode, an exemplary structure of a mobile phone including the display device of the present invention in a display portion is explained with reference to
FIG. 34 . - A
display panel 3410 is incorporated in ahousing 3400 so as to be detachable. The shape and size of thehousing 3400 can be appropriately changed in accordance with the size of thedisplay panel 3410. Thehousing 3400 to which thedisplay panel 3410 is fixed is fitted in a printedcircuit board 3401 and assembled as a module. - The
display panel 3410 is connected to the printedcircuit board 3401 through anFPC 3411. The printedcircuit board 3401 is provided with aspeaker 3402, amicrophone 3403, a transmitting/receiving circuit 3404, and asignal processing circuit 3405 including a CPU, a controller, and the like. Such a module, an input means 3406, and a buttery 3407 are combined and stored in achassis 3409 and achassis 3412. Note that a pixel portion of thedisplay panel 3410 is arranged so as to be seen from a window formed in thechassis 3412. - In the
display panel 3410, the pixel portion and a part of peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a low operation frequency among a plurality of driver circuits) may be formed using transistors over the same substrate, and another part of the peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a high operation frequency among the plurality of driver circuits) may be formed on an IC chip. The IC chip may be mounted on thedisplay panel 3410 by COG (Chip On Glass). The IC chip may alternatively be connected to a glass substrate using TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or a printed circuit board. Further, all of the peripheral driver circuits may be formed on an IC chip and the IC chip may be mounted on a display panel by COG or the like. - Note that the pixel described in any of
Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for the pixel portion. According to the present invention, variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and thedisplay panel 3410 including a display portion with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained. In addition, power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. A cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors. - The structure of a mobile phone described in this embodiment mode is one example, and the display device of the invention can be applied not only to the mobile phone having the above-described structure but also to mobile phones having various kinds of structures.
- In this embodiment mode, an EL module obtained by combining a display panle and a circuit board is explained with reference to
FIGS. 35 and 36 . - As shown in
FIG. 35 , adisplay panel 3501 includes apixel portion 3503, a scanline driver circuit 3504, and a signalline driver circuit 3505. Over acircuit board 3502, for example, acontrol circuit 3506, asignal dividing circuit 3507, and the like are formed. Note that thedisplay panel 3501 and thecircuit board 3502 are connected to each other by aconnection wiring 3508. As theconnection wiring 3508, an FPC or the like can be used. - In the
display panel 3501, the pixel portion and a part of peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a low operation frequency among a plurality of driver circuits) may be formed using transistors over the same substrate, and another part of the peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a high operation frequency among the plurality of driver circuits) may be formed on an IC chip. The IC chip may be mounted on thedisplay panel 3501 by COG (Chip On Glass). The IC chip may alternatively be connected to a glass substrate using TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or a printed circuit board. Further, all of the peripheral driver circuits may be formed on an IC chip and the IC chip may be mounted on a display panel by COG or the like. - Note that the pixel described in any of
Embodiment Modes 1 to 7 is used for the pixel portion. According to the present invention, variation in luminance among pixels or fluctuation in luminance of a pixel over time can be suppressed and thedisplay panel 3501 with a higher duty ratio and higher quality can be obtained. In addition, power consumption can be reduced in the present invention because operation is performed with an opposite electrode fixed at a constant potential. A cost reduction can be achieved by using transistors with single polarity for transistors included in the pixel portion and a non-crystalline semiconductor film for semiconductor layers of the transistors. - An EL TV receiver can be completed with this EL module.
FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing the main structure of an EL TV receiver. Atuner 3601 receives a video signal and an audio signal. The video signal is processed by a videosignal amplifier circuit 3602, a videosignal processing circuit 3603 for converting a signal outputted from the videosignal amplifier circuit 3602 into a color signal corresponding to each color of red, green and blue, and acontrol circuit 3506 for converting the video signal into a signal which meets the input specification of a driver circuit. Thecontrol circuit 3506 outputs respective signals to a scan line side and a signal line side. In the case of performing a digital drive, it is possible to adopt a structure in which thesignal dividing circuit 3507 is provided on the signal line side to supply an input digital signal divided into m pieces. - The audio signal among the signals received by the
tuner 3601 is transmitted to an audiosignal amplifier circuit 3604, the output of which is supplied to a speaker 3606 through an audio signal processing circuit 3605. Acontrol circuit 3607 receives control information of a receiving station (reception frequency) or sound volume from aninput portion 3608 and transmits signals to thetuner 3601 and the audio signal processing circuit 3605. - By incorporating the EL module in
FIG. 35 into thechassis 3301 ofFIG. 33A described in Embodiment Mode 10, a TV receiver can be completed. - Naturally, the present invention is not limited to the TV receiver, and can be applied to various uses particularly as a large-sized display medium such as an information display board at a train station, an airport, or the like, or an advertisement display board on the street, as well as a monitor of a personal computer.
- This application is based on Japanese Patent Application serial no. 2005-349165 filed in Japan Patent Office on Dec. 2, 2005, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
Claims (55)
Priority Applications (5)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US13/691,286 US8890180B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2012-11-30 | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US14/541,255 US9997584B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2014-11-14 | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US15/996,704 US20180277615A1 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2018-06-04 | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US16/926,878 US11417720B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2020-07-13 | Display device including n-channel transistor including polysilicon |
US17/886,496 US12063829B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2022-08-12 | Display device |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2005349165 | 2005-12-02 | ||
JP2005-349165 | 2005-12-02 |
Related Child Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/691,286 Continuation US8890180B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2012-11-30 | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20070126664A1 true US20070126664A1 (en) | 2007-06-07 |
US8325111B2 US8325111B2 (en) | 2012-12-04 |
Family
ID=37814469
Family Applications (6)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US11/562,678 Active 2028-07-23 US8325111B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2006-11-22 | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US13/691,286 Active US8890180B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2012-11-30 | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US14/541,255 Active 2027-01-21 US9997584B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2014-11-14 | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US15/996,704 Abandoned US20180277615A1 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2018-06-04 | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US16/926,878 Active US11417720B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2020-07-13 | Display device including n-channel transistor including polysilicon |
US17/886,496 Active US12063829B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2022-08-12 | Display device |
Family Applications After (5)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/691,286 Active US8890180B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2012-11-30 | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US14/541,255 Active 2027-01-21 US9997584B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2014-11-14 | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US15/996,704 Abandoned US20180277615A1 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2018-06-04 | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US16/926,878 Active US11417720B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2020-07-13 | Display device including n-channel transistor including polysilicon |
US17/886,496 Active US12063829B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2022-08-12 | Display device |
Country Status (6)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (6) | US8325111B2 (en) |
EP (1) | EP1793366A3 (en) |
JP (14) | JP2012141627A (en) |
KR (1) | KR101359413B1 (en) |
CN (2) | CN1975844B (en) |
TW (2) | TWI415066B (en) |
Cited By (33)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20070236424A1 (en) * | 2006-04-05 | 2007-10-11 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US20080225061A1 (en) * | 2006-10-26 | 2008-09-18 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Electronic device, display device, and semiconductor device and method for driving the same |
US20090001378A1 (en) * | 2007-06-29 | 2009-01-01 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and driving method thereof |
US20100001931A1 (en) * | 2005-04-15 | 2010-01-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and electronic device using the same |
US20100220117A1 (en) * | 2009-02-27 | 2010-09-02 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for Driving Semiconductor Device |
US20110227893A1 (en) * | 2010-03-16 | 2011-09-22 | Samsung Mobile Display Co., Ltd. | Pixel and organic light emitting display including the same |
US20130033475A1 (en) * | 2011-08-05 | 2013-02-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display Device |
US20130321248A1 (en) * | 2012-06-01 | 2013-12-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor Device and Method for Driving Semiconductor Device |
US20130321249A1 (en) * | 2012-06-01 | 2013-12-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor Device and Method for Driving Semiconductor Device |
US8633874B2 (en) | 2009-05-22 | 2014-01-21 | Panasonic Corporation | Display device and method of driving the same |
US8710505B2 (en) | 2011-08-05 | 2014-04-29 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
CN103927981A (en) * | 2014-03-24 | 2014-07-16 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Pixel circuit and driving method and display device thereof |
US8878589B2 (en) | 2011-06-30 | 2014-11-04 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and driving method thereof |
US8890180B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2014-11-18 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US8901828B2 (en) | 2011-09-09 | 2014-12-02 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US8912985B2 (en) | 2011-05-12 | 2014-12-16 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for driving display device |
US8922464B2 (en) | 2011-05-11 | 2014-12-30 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Active matrix display device and driving method thereof |
US9030105B2 (en) | 2011-04-01 | 2015-05-12 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device |
US9035852B2 (en) | 2011-05-13 | 2015-05-19 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for driving light-emitting device |
US20150214249A1 (en) * | 2013-03-28 | 2015-07-30 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Array Substrate, Display Device and Manufacturing Method |
US9230996B2 (en) | 2013-12-27 | 2016-01-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device |
US9280931B2 (en) | 2011-10-18 | 2016-03-08 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US20170040409A1 (en) * | 2008-09-19 | 2017-02-09 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US20170317107A1 (en) * | 2013-11-05 | 2017-11-02 | Ananda H. Kumar | Novel silicon-based backplane structures and methods for display applications |
US10008149B2 (en) | 2011-07-22 | 2018-06-26 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device including pixels suppressing variation in luminance |
US20180218678A1 (en) * | 2017-02-01 | 2018-08-02 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Pixel and display device including the same |
US10043794B2 (en) | 2012-03-22 | 2018-08-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and electronic device |
US10483293B2 (en) | 2014-02-27 | 2019-11-19 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Active matrix display device, and module and electronic appliance including the same |
CN111402814A (en) * | 2020-03-26 | 2020-07-10 | 昆山国显光电有限公司 | Display panel, driving method of display panel and display device |
US11094241B2 (en) * | 2019-07-05 | 2021-08-17 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Display driver, electro-optical device, electronic apparatus, and mobile body |
US11637152B2 (en) * | 2019-06-11 | 2023-04-25 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Array substrate and method for manufacturing the same, and display device having photosensitive element, light emitting device and sensing transistor |
US11854483B2 (en) | 2019-10-31 | 2023-12-26 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Display device, pixel circuit, and method for driving same |
US12068335B2 (en) * | 2013-12-12 | 2024-08-20 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device |
Families Citing this family (22)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
KR101388303B1 (en) * | 2007-10-10 | 2014-04-23 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Organic Light Emitting Display and Driving Method of the same |
KR20120068772A (en) | 2009-09-16 | 2012-06-27 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Light-emitting device and manufacturing method thereof |
JP2011107692A (en) | 2009-10-20 | 2011-06-02 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Method of driving display device, display device, and electronic apparatus |
US8994621B2 (en) * | 2010-07-12 | 2015-03-31 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Display device and method for driving same |
KR101916921B1 (en) | 2011-03-29 | 2018-11-09 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device and driving method thereof |
JP5832399B2 (en) | 2011-09-16 | 2015-12-16 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Light emitting device |
TW201315284A (en) * | 2011-09-19 | 2013-04-01 | Wintek Corp | Driving circuit for a light emitting device |
US8995607B2 (en) | 2012-05-31 | 2015-03-31 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Pulse signal output circuit and shift register |
US9320111B2 (en) | 2012-05-31 | 2016-04-19 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device |
JP6400961B2 (en) * | 2013-07-12 | 2018-10-03 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Display device |
JP6426402B2 (en) * | 2013-08-30 | 2018-11-21 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Display device |
US9083320B2 (en) | 2013-09-20 | 2015-07-14 | Maofeng YANG | Apparatus and method for electrical stability compensation |
KR20180047606A (en) * | 2016-10-31 | 2018-05-10 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Organic Light Emitting Display Device |
JP6707182B2 (en) * | 2017-03-22 | 2020-06-10 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Receiver and communication system |
WO2019145795A2 (en) | 2018-01-26 | 2019-08-01 | Cellink Ab | Systems and methods for optical assessments of bioink printability |
US11186736B2 (en) | 2018-10-10 | 2021-11-30 | Cellink Ab | Double network bioinks |
US11341878B2 (en) | 2019-03-21 | 2022-05-24 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Display panel and method of testing display panel |
TWI692749B (en) * | 2019-05-21 | 2020-05-01 | 友達光電股份有限公司 | Driving method and display device |
US11826951B2 (en) | 2019-09-06 | 2023-11-28 | Cellink Ab | Temperature-controlled multi-material overprinting |
CN110706629B (en) * | 2019-09-27 | 2023-08-29 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Detection method and detection device for display substrate |
JP7523106B2 (en) * | 2020-02-12 | 2024-07-26 | 深▲セン▼通鋭微電子技術有限公司 | Display device |
KR20220148999A (en) * | 2021-04-29 | 2022-11-08 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device and driving method of the same |
Citations (30)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5684365A (en) * | 1994-12-14 | 1997-11-04 | Eastman Kodak Company | TFT-el display panel using organic electroluminescent media |
US5956011A (en) * | 1995-10-14 | 1999-09-21 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Matrix type liquid-crystal display unit |
US6229508B1 (en) * | 1997-09-29 | 2001-05-08 | Sarnoff Corporation | Active matrix light emitting diode pixel structure and concomitant method |
US20030090481A1 (en) * | 2001-11-13 | 2003-05-15 | Hajime Kimura | Display device and method for driving the same |
US20030103022A1 (en) * | 2001-11-09 | 2003-06-05 | Yukihiro Noguchi | Display apparatus with function for initializing luminance data of optical element |
US20030117352A1 (en) * | 2001-10-24 | 2003-06-26 | Hajime Kimura | Semiconductor device and driving method thereof |
US20030132931A1 (en) * | 2001-10-30 | 2003-07-17 | Hajime Kimura | Semiconductor device and driving method thereof |
US20030137503A1 (en) * | 2002-01-24 | 2003-07-24 | Hajime Kimura | Semiconductor device and method of driving the semiconductor device |
US20030214245A1 (en) * | 2002-02-28 | 2003-11-20 | Shunpei Yamazaki | Light emitting device |
US6714178B2 (en) * | 2000-05-12 | 2004-03-30 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device |
US20040080474A1 (en) * | 2001-10-26 | 2004-04-29 | Hajime Kimura | Light-emitting device and driving method thereof |
US20040174349A1 (en) * | 2003-03-04 | 2004-09-09 | Libsch Frank Robert | Driving circuits for displays |
US20040174354A1 (en) * | 2003-02-24 | 2004-09-09 | Shinya Ono | Display apparatus controlling brightness of current-controlled light emitting element |
US6839057B2 (en) * | 2001-09-05 | 2005-01-04 | Nec Corporation | Circuit for and method of driving current-driven device |
US20050093804A1 (en) * | 2001-09-21 | 2005-05-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd., A Japan Corporation | Light emitting device, driving method of light emitting device and electronic device |
US6928136B2 (en) * | 2001-05-29 | 2005-08-09 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Pulse output circuit, shift register, and display device |
US6958750B2 (en) * | 2001-07-16 | 2005-10-25 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting device |
US6975142B2 (en) * | 2001-04-27 | 2005-12-13 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US20060077134A1 (en) * | 2003-01-24 | 2006-04-13 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Active matrix display devices |
US20060082528A1 (en) * | 2004-10-13 | 2006-04-20 | Chi Mei Optoelectronics Corp. | Organic light emitting diode circuit having voltage compensation function and method for compensating |
US7068076B2 (en) * | 2001-08-03 | 2006-06-27 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and display device |
US7129917B2 (en) * | 2000-02-29 | 2006-10-31 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device |
US7173590B2 (en) * | 2004-06-02 | 2007-02-06 | Sony Corporation | Pixel circuit, active matrix apparatus and display apparatus |
US20070091029A1 (en) * | 2003-12-02 | 2007-04-26 | Sony Corporation | Transistor circuit, pixel circuit, display device, and driving method therefor |
US20070126665A1 (en) * | 2005-12-02 | 2007-06-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US7274345B2 (en) * | 2003-05-19 | 2007-09-25 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Electro-optical device and driving device thereof |
US20070236424A1 (en) * | 2006-04-05 | 2007-10-11 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US7327357B2 (en) * | 2004-10-08 | 2008-02-05 | Samsung Sdi Co., Ltd. | Pixel circuit and light emitting display comprising the same |
US7502001B2 (en) * | 2003-03-12 | 2009-03-10 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light emissive active matrix display devices with optical feedback effective on the timing, to counteract ageing |
US7714813B2 (en) * | 2003-06-04 | 2010-05-11 | Sony Corporation | Pixel circuit, display device, and method for driving pixel circuit |
Family Cites Families (100)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH03233431A (en) | 1990-02-09 | 1991-10-17 | Hitachi Ltd | Liquid crystal display panel |
JP3629939B2 (en) | 1998-03-18 | 2005-03-16 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Transistor circuit, display panel and electronic device |
US6724149B2 (en) | 1999-02-24 | 2004-04-20 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Emissive display device and electroluminescence display device with uniform luminance |
TW591584B (en) * | 1999-10-21 | 2004-06-11 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Active matrix type display device |
US6587086B1 (en) * | 1999-10-26 | 2003-07-01 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Electro-optical device |
TW484117B (en) * | 1999-11-08 | 2002-04-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Electronic device |
JP4514861B2 (en) * | 1999-11-29 | 2010-07-28 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Laser irradiation apparatus, laser irradiation method, and manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
TW587239B (en) * | 1999-11-30 | 2004-05-11 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Electric device |
TW480727B (en) * | 2000-01-11 | 2002-03-21 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratro | Semiconductor display device |
US7301520B2 (en) * | 2000-02-22 | 2007-11-27 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Image display device and driver circuit therefor |
TW495854B (en) * | 2000-03-06 | 2002-07-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
JP3918412B2 (en) | 2000-08-10 | 2007-05-23 | ソニー株式会社 | Thin film semiconductor device, liquid crystal display device and manufacturing method thereof |
JP5030345B2 (en) | 2000-09-29 | 2012-09-19 | 三洋電機株式会社 | Semiconductor device |
JP4211250B2 (en) | 2000-10-12 | 2009-01-21 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Transistor and display device including the same |
KR100675319B1 (en) | 2000-12-23 | 2007-01-26 | 엘지.필립스 엘시디 주식회사 | Electro Luminescence Panel |
JP4869497B2 (en) | 2001-05-30 | 2012-02-08 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Display device |
TWI221268B (en) * | 2001-09-07 | 2004-09-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Light emitting device and method of driving the same |
JP2003186437A (en) * | 2001-12-18 | 2003-07-04 | Sanyo Electric Co Ltd | Display device |
JP3800404B2 (en) | 2001-12-19 | 2006-07-26 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Image display device |
JP2003255899A (en) | 2001-12-28 | 2003-09-10 | Sanyo Electric Co Ltd | Display device |
JP4029840B2 (en) | 2002-01-17 | 2008-01-09 | 日本電気株式会社 | Semiconductor device having matrix type current load driving circuit and driving method thereof |
JP2003224437A (en) | 2002-01-30 | 2003-08-08 | Sanyo Electric Co Ltd | Current drive circuit and display device equipped with the current drive circuit |
JP2003308030A (en) | 2002-02-18 | 2003-10-31 | Sanyo Electric Co Ltd | Display device |
JP3961310B2 (en) | 2002-02-21 | 2007-08-22 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
JP3613253B2 (en) * | 2002-03-14 | 2005-01-26 | 日本電気株式会社 | Current control element drive circuit and image display device |
WO2003075256A1 (en) | 2002-03-05 | 2003-09-12 | Nec Corporation | Image display and its control method |
KR100461467B1 (en) * | 2002-03-13 | 2004-12-13 | 엘지.필립스 엘시디 주식회사 | an active matrix organic electroluminescence display device |
JP3997109B2 (en) | 2002-05-08 | 2007-10-24 | キヤノン株式会社 | EL element driving circuit and display panel |
TWI345211B (en) | 2002-05-17 | 2011-07-11 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Display apparatus and driving method thereof |
KR100640049B1 (en) * | 2002-06-07 | 2006-10-31 | 엘지.필립스 엘시디 주식회사 | Method and apparatus for driving organic electroluminescence device |
KR100432651B1 (en) | 2002-06-18 | 2004-05-22 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | An image display apparatus |
JP4019843B2 (en) | 2002-07-31 | 2007-12-12 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Electronic circuit, electronic circuit driving method, electro-optical device, electro-optical device driving method, and electronic apparatus |
EP1388842B1 (en) | 2002-08-09 | 2013-10-02 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Multi-window display device and method of driving the same |
TWI318490B (en) | 2002-08-30 | 2009-12-11 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Current source circuit, display device using the same and driving method thereof |
JP2004101767A (en) * | 2002-09-06 | 2004-04-02 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Driving method of light emitting device |
TW571281B (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2004-01-11 | Au Optronics Corp | Driving circuit and method for a display device and display device therewith |
JP2004138773A (en) * | 2002-10-17 | 2004-05-13 | Tohoku Pioneer Corp | Active type light emission display device |
US7738014B2 (en) | 2002-12-05 | 2010-06-15 | Atlab Inc. | Image sensor and optical pointing system |
JP4344698B2 (en) | 2002-12-25 | 2009-10-14 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | DIGITAL CIRCUIT HAVING CORRECTION CIRCUIT AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE HAVING THE SAME |
JP2004226543A (en) * | 2003-01-21 | 2004-08-12 | Sharp Corp | Display device |
JP2004361424A (en) | 2003-03-19 | 2004-12-24 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Element substrate, light emitting device and driving method of light emitting device |
US7724216B2 (en) * | 2003-04-07 | 2010-05-25 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Display panel |
JP4049010B2 (en) | 2003-04-30 | 2008-02-20 | ソニー株式会社 | Display device |
JP2004341144A (en) | 2003-05-15 | 2004-12-02 | Hitachi Ltd | Image display device |
JP4016962B2 (en) * | 2003-05-19 | 2007-12-05 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Electro-optical device and driving method of electro-optical device |
JP4168836B2 (en) | 2003-06-03 | 2008-10-22 | ソニー株式会社 | Display device |
JP2005017485A (en) | 2003-06-24 | 2005-01-20 | Seiko Epson Corp | Electro-optical device, driving method of electro-optical device, and electronic apparatus |
KR101001040B1 (en) * | 2003-06-30 | 2010-12-14 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Liquid crystal display module and driving apparatus thereof |
US8552933B2 (en) * | 2003-06-30 | 2013-10-08 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting device and driving method of the same |
US7172943B2 (en) * | 2003-08-13 | 2007-02-06 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company, Ltd. | Multiple-gate transistors formed on bulk substrates |
JP2005099713A (en) * | 2003-08-25 | 2005-04-14 | Seiko Epson Corp | Electro-optical device, driving method therefor, and electronic apparatus |
GB0320503D0 (en) * | 2003-09-02 | 2003-10-01 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | Active maxtrix display devices |
JP2005084416A (en) | 2003-09-09 | 2005-03-31 | Sharp Corp | Active matrix substrate and display device using it |
US7038392B2 (en) | 2003-09-26 | 2006-05-02 | International Business Machines Corporation | Active-matrix light emitting display and method for obtaining threshold voltage compensation for same |
JP4338131B2 (en) * | 2003-09-30 | 2009-10-07 | インターナショナル・ビジネス・マシーンズ・コーポレーション | TFT array, display panel, and inspection method of TFT array |
JP2005121843A (en) * | 2003-10-15 | 2005-05-12 | Toshiba Matsushita Display Technology Co Ltd | Current output type semiconductor circuit |
JP4297438B2 (en) | 2003-11-24 | 2009-07-15 | 三星モバイルディスプレイ株式會社 | Light emitting display device, display panel, and driving method of light emitting display device |
US6821880B1 (en) | 2003-12-01 | 2004-11-23 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co. Ltd. | Process of dual or single damascene utilizing separate etching and DCM apparati |
JP2005164894A (en) | 2003-12-02 | 2005-06-23 | Sony Corp | Pixel circuit and display device, and their driving methods |
JP3962009B2 (en) * | 2003-12-05 | 2007-08-22 | 株式会社東芝 | Manufacturing method of semiconductor device |
EP1544842B1 (en) | 2003-12-18 | 2018-08-22 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and manufacturing method thereof |
US7405713B2 (en) | 2003-12-25 | 2008-07-29 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting device and electronic equipment using the same |
JP2005189643A (en) | 2003-12-26 | 2005-07-14 | Sony Corp | Display device and method for driving display device |
JP4501429B2 (en) | 2004-01-05 | 2010-07-14 | ソニー株式会社 | Pixel circuit and display device |
JP4547605B2 (en) | 2004-01-19 | 2010-09-22 | ソニー株式会社 | Display device and driving method thereof |
JP3985788B2 (en) | 2004-01-22 | 2007-10-03 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Electro-optical device and electronic apparatus |
JP2005242323A (en) * | 2004-01-26 | 2005-09-08 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Display device and its driving method |
US7268332B2 (en) | 2004-01-26 | 2007-09-11 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and driving method of the same |
JP4529467B2 (en) * | 2004-02-13 | 2010-08-25 | ソニー株式会社 | Pixel circuit and display device |
US7928937B2 (en) | 2004-04-28 | 2011-04-19 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting device |
US8760374B2 (en) | 2004-05-21 | 2014-06-24 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device having a light emitting element |
JP4103850B2 (en) | 2004-06-02 | 2008-06-18 | ソニー株式会社 | Pixel circuit, active matrix device, and display device |
JP4103851B2 (en) | 2004-06-02 | 2008-06-18 | ソニー株式会社 | Pixel circuit, active matrix device, and display device |
JP4160032B2 (en) | 2004-09-01 | 2008-10-01 | シャープ株式会社 | Display device and driving method thereof |
CN100555375C (en) | 2004-09-17 | 2009-10-28 | 日本电气株式会社 | Semiconductor devices, the circuit that uses this device and display device and driving method thereof |
KR100604053B1 (en) | 2004-10-13 | 2006-07-24 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Light emitting display |
KR20060054603A (en) * | 2004-11-15 | 2006-05-23 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Display device and driving method thereof |
US8426866B2 (en) | 2004-11-30 | 2013-04-23 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and driving method thereof, semiconductor device, and electronic apparatus |
KR100604066B1 (en) * | 2004-12-24 | 2006-07-24 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Pixel and Light Emitting Display Using The Same |
JP4923410B2 (en) | 2005-02-02 | 2012-04-25 | ソニー株式会社 | Pixel circuit and display device |
JP2006215275A (en) | 2005-02-03 | 2006-08-17 | Sony Corp | Display apparatus |
JP2006227239A (en) | 2005-02-17 | 2006-08-31 | Sony Corp | Display device and display method |
JP2006227237A (en) | 2005-02-17 | 2006-08-31 | Sony Corp | Display device and display method |
JP2006227238A (en) | 2005-02-17 | 2006-08-31 | Sony Corp | Display device and display method |
JP2006243526A (en) | 2005-03-04 | 2006-09-14 | Sony Corp | Display device, and pixel driving method |
JP2006243525A (en) | 2005-03-04 | 2006-09-14 | Sony Corp | Display device |
JP4706288B2 (en) | 2005-03-14 | 2011-06-22 | ソニー株式会社 | Pixel circuit and display device |
KR100719924B1 (en) * | 2005-04-29 | 2007-05-18 | 비오이 하이디스 테크놀로지 주식회사 | Organic electroluminescence display device |
JP4738056B2 (en) * | 2005-05-24 | 2011-08-03 | 株式会社日立メディコ | Magnetic resonance imaging system |
KR101139527B1 (en) | 2005-06-27 | 2012-05-02 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Oled |
US7888721B2 (en) * | 2005-07-06 | 2011-02-15 | Micron Technology, Inc. | Surround gate access transistors with grown ultra-thin bodies |
JP2007108380A (en) * | 2005-10-13 | 2007-04-26 | Sony Corp | Display device and driving method of display device |
JP2007140318A (en) | 2005-11-22 | 2007-06-07 | Sony Corp | Pixel circuit |
US7728810B2 (en) | 2005-11-28 | 2010-06-01 | Lg Display Co., Ltd. | Display device and method for driving the same |
EP1793366A3 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2009-11-04 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
JP5025242B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2012-09-12 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device, display device, module, and electronic device |
JP2007206590A (en) | 2006-02-06 | 2007-08-16 | Seiko Epson Corp | Pixel circuit, driving method thereof, display device, and electronic apparatus |
JP5665256B2 (en) | 2006-12-20 | 2015-02-04 | キヤノン株式会社 | Luminescent display device |
KR100860684B1 (en) | 2007-01-31 | 2008-09-26 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Display apparatus with display brightness control function |
KR100823199B1 (en) | 2007-04-05 | 2008-04-18 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Organic light emitting diode display |
-
2006
- 2006-11-17 EP EP20060023935 patent/EP1793366A3/en not_active Ceased
- 2006-11-22 US US11/562,678 patent/US8325111B2/en active Active
- 2006-11-28 KR KR1020060118112A patent/KR101359413B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2006-12-01 CN CN2006101636202A patent/CN1975844B/en active Active
- 2006-12-01 TW TW95144860A patent/TWI415066B/en active
- 2006-12-01 TW TW102131282A patent/TWI527011B/en active
- 2006-12-01 CN CN201210109159.8A patent/CN102637407B/en active Active
-
2012
- 2012-03-02 JP JP2012046227A patent/JP2012141627A/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2012-11-30 US US13/691,286 patent/US8890180B2/en active Active
-
2013
- 2013-08-26 JP JP2013174528A patent/JP2014038334A/en not_active Withdrawn
-
2014
- 2014-11-06 JP JP2014225956A patent/JP2015079253A/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2014-11-06 JP JP2014225957A patent/JP2015064591A/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2014-11-14 US US14/541,255 patent/US9997584B2/en active Active
-
2016
- 2016-11-16 JP JP2016223136A patent/JP6346928B2/en active Active
-
2017
- 2017-12-19 JP JP2017242630A patent/JP2018087981A/en not_active Withdrawn
-
2018
- 2018-06-04 US US15/996,704 patent/US20180277615A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2018-12-17 JP JP2018235666A patent/JP6756807B2/en active Active
- 2018-12-17 JP JP2018235664A patent/JP2019082695A/en not_active Withdrawn
-
2020
- 2020-02-07 JP JP2020019295A patent/JP6975275B2/en active Active
- 2020-07-13 US US16/926,878 patent/US11417720B2/en active Active
- 2020-07-14 JP JP2020120399A patent/JP2020194169A/en not_active Withdrawn
-
2021
- 2021-10-21 JP JP2021172203A patent/JP2022017365A/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2021-11-04 JP JP2021180156A patent/JP2022028722A/en not_active Withdrawn
-
2022
- 2022-08-12 US US17/886,496 patent/US12063829B2/en active Active
-
2023
- 2023-03-28 JP JP2023051321A patent/JP2023085396A/en active Pending
- 2023-08-07 JP JP2023128522A patent/JP2023164804A/en active Pending
Patent Citations (39)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5684365A (en) * | 1994-12-14 | 1997-11-04 | Eastman Kodak Company | TFT-el display panel using organic electroluminescent media |
US5956011A (en) * | 1995-10-14 | 1999-09-21 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Matrix type liquid-crystal display unit |
US6037924A (en) * | 1995-10-14 | 2000-03-14 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Matrix type liquid-crystal display unit |
US6310598B1 (en) * | 1995-10-14 | 2001-10-30 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Matrix type liquid-crystal display unit |
US6608613B2 (en) * | 1995-10-14 | 2003-08-19 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Matrix type liquid-crystal display unit |
US6229508B1 (en) * | 1997-09-29 | 2001-05-08 | Sarnoff Corporation | Active matrix light emitting diode pixel structure and concomitant method |
US20010024186A1 (en) * | 1997-09-29 | 2001-09-27 | Sarnoff Corporation | Active matrix light emitting diode pixel structure and concomitant method |
US7129917B2 (en) * | 2000-02-29 | 2006-10-31 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device |
US6714178B2 (en) * | 2000-05-12 | 2004-03-30 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device |
US6975142B2 (en) * | 2001-04-27 | 2005-12-13 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US7151278B2 (en) * | 2001-05-29 | 2006-12-19 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Pulse output circuit, shift register, and display device |
US6928136B2 (en) * | 2001-05-29 | 2005-08-09 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Pulse output circuit, shift register, and display device |
US6958750B2 (en) * | 2001-07-16 | 2005-10-25 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting device |
US7068076B2 (en) * | 2001-08-03 | 2006-06-27 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and display device |
US6839057B2 (en) * | 2001-09-05 | 2005-01-04 | Nec Corporation | Circuit for and method of driving current-driven device |
US20050093804A1 (en) * | 2001-09-21 | 2005-05-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd., A Japan Corporation | Light emitting device, driving method of light emitting device and electronic device |
US20030117352A1 (en) * | 2001-10-24 | 2003-06-26 | Hajime Kimura | Semiconductor device and driving method thereof |
US20040080474A1 (en) * | 2001-10-26 | 2004-04-29 | Hajime Kimura | Light-emitting device and driving method thereof |
US20030132931A1 (en) * | 2001-10-30 | 2003-07-17 | Hajime Kimura | Semiconductor device and driving method thereof |
US20030103022A1 (en) * | 2001-11-09 | 2003-06-05 | Yukihiro Noguchi | Display apparatus with function for initializing luminance data of optical element |
US20030090481A1 (en) * | 2001-11-13 | 2003-05-15 | Hajime Kimura | Display device and method for driving the same |
US20030137503A1 (en) * | 2002-01-24 | 2003-07-24 | Hajime Kimura | Semiconductor device and method of driving the semiconductor device |
US20030214245A1 (en) * | 2002-02-28 | 2003-11-20 | Shunpei Yamazaki | Light emitting device |
US20060077134A1 (en) * | 2003-01-24 | 2006-04-13 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Active matrix display devices |
US7564433B2 (en) * | 2003-01-24 | 2009-07-21 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Active matrix display devices |
US20040174354A1 (en) * | 2003-02-24 | 2004-09-09 | Shinya Ono | Display apparatus controlling brightness of current-controlled light emitting element |
US20040174349A1 (en) * | 2003-03-04 | 2004-09-09 | Libsch Frank Robert | Driving circuits for displays |
US7502001B2 (en) * | 2003-03-12 | 2009-03-10 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light emissive active matrix display devices with optical feedback effective on the timing, to counteract ageing |
US7274345B2 (en) * | 2003-05-19 | 2007-09-25 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Electro-optical device and driving device thereof |
US20070296652A1 (en) * | 2003-05-19 | 2007-12-27 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Electro-optical device and driving device thereof |
US20110063275A1 (en) * | 2003-05-19 | 2011-03-17 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Electro-optical device and driving device thereof |
US7714813B2 (en) * | 2003-06-04 | 2010-05-11 | Sony Corporation | Pixel circuit, display device, and method for driving pixel circuit |
US20070091029A1 (en) * | 2003-12-02 | 2007-04-26 | Sony Corporation | Transistor circuit, pixel circuit, display device, and driving method therefor |
US7605789B2 (en) * | 2003-12-02 | 2009-10-20 | Sony Corporation | Transistor circuit, pixel circuit, display device, and driving method therefor |
US7173590B2 (en) * | 2004-06-02 | 2007-02-06 | Sony Corporation | Pixel circuit, active matrix apparatus and display apparatus |
US7327357B2 (en) * | 2004-10-08 | 2008-02-05 | Samsung Sdi Co., Ltd. | Pixel circuit and light emitting display comprising the same |
US20060082528A1 (en) * | 2004-10-13 | 2006-04-20 | Chi Mei Optoelectronics Corp. | Organic light emitting diode circuit having voltage compensation function and method for compensating |
US20070126665A1 (en) * | 2005-12-02 | 2007-06-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US20070236424A1 (en) * | 2006-04-05 | 2007-10-11 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
Cited By (87)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8325167B2 (en) * | 2005-04-15 | 2012-12-04 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and electronic device using the same |
US9093571B2 (en) * | 2005-04-15 | 2015-07-28 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and electronic device using the same |
US20100001931A1 (en) * | 2005-04-15 | 2010-01-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and electronic device using the same |
US20130075738A1 (en) * | 2005-04-15 | 2013-03-28 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display Device and Electronic Device Using the Same |
US9997584B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2018-06-12 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US8890180B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2014-11-18 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US11417720B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2022-08-16 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device including n-channel transistor including polysilicon |
US12063829B2 (en) | 2005-12-02 | 2024-08-13 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device |
US8872739B2 (en) | 2006-04-05 | 2014-10-28 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US7817117B2 (en) * | 2006-04-05 | 2010-10-19 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US9379142B2 (en) | 2006-04-05 | 2016-06-28 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US8164547B2 (en) | 2006-04-05 | 2012-04-24 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US20110024760A1 (en) * | 2006-04-05 | 2011-02-03 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US7982696B2 (en) | 2006-04-05 | 2011-07-19 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US9041630B2 (en) | 2006-04-05 | 2015-05-26 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US20070236424A1 (en) * | 2006-04-05 | 2007-10-11 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US8599115B2 (en) | 2006-04-05 | 2013-12-03 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US9569996B2 (en) | 2006-04-05 | 2017-02-14 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
US11887535B2 (en) * | 2006-10-26 | 2024-01-30 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Electronic device, display device, and semiconductor device and method for driving the same |
US20220051626A1 (en) * | 2006-10-26 | 2022-02-17 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Electronic device, display device, and semiconductor device and method for driving the same |
US20140346506A1 (en) * | 2006-10-26 | 2014-11-27 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Electronic device, display device, and semiconductor device and method for driving the same |
US20080225061A1 (en) * | 2006-10-26 | 2008-09-18 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Electronic device, display device, and semiconductor device and method for driving the same |
US8803768B2 (en) * | 2006-10-26 | 2014-08-12 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Electronic device, display device, and semiconductor device and method for driving the same |
US10546529B2 (en) | 2006-10-26 | 2020-01-28 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Electronic device, display device, and semiconductor device and method for driving the same |
US20110001545A1 (en) * | 2007-06-29 | 2011-01-06 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and driving method thereof |
US8816359B2 (en) | 2007-06-29 | 2014-08-26 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and driving method thereof |
US7808008B2 (en) | 2007-06-29 | 2010-10-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and driving method thereof |
US8338835B2 (en) | 2007-06-29 | 2012-12-25 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and driving method thereof |
US20090001378A1 (en) * | 2007-06-29 | 2009-01-01 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and driving method thereof |
US20170040409A1 (en) * | 2008-09-19 | 2017-02-09 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US11139359B2 (en) * | 2008-09-19 | 2021-10-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US20150280005A1 (en) * | 2009-02-27 | 2015-10-01 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd | Method for driving semiconductor device |
CN106409228A (en) * | 2009-02-27 | 2017-02-15 | 株式会社半导体能源研究所 | Method for driving semiconductor device |
US11387368B2 (en) * | 2009-02-27 | 2022-07-12 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for driving semiconductor device |
JP2019211786A (en) * | 2009-02-27 | 2019-12-12 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device |
JP2018077476A (en) * | 2009-02-27 | 2018-05-17 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device |
US9047815B2 (en) * | 2009-02-27 | 2015-06-02 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for driving semiconductor device |
TWI488161B (en) * | 2009-02-27 | 2015-06-11 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Method for driving semiconductor device |
US20190006522A1 (en) * | 2009-02-27 | 2019-01-03 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for driving semiconductor device |
US10930787B2 (en) | 2009-02-27 | 2021-02-23 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for driving semiconductor device |
US20100220117A1 (en) * | 2009-02-27 | 2010-09-02 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for Driving Semiconductor Device |
US8633874B2 (en) | 2009-05-22 | 2014-01-21 | Panasonic Corporation | Display device and method of driving the same |
US20110227893A1 (en) * | 2010-03-16 | 2011-09-22 | Samsung Mobile Display Co., Ltd. | Pixel and organic light emitting display including the same |
US9030105B2 (en) | 2011-04-01 | 2015-05-12 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device |
US8922464B2 (en) | 2011-05-11 | 2014-12-30 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Active matrix display device and driving method thereof |
US8912985B2 (en) | 2011-05-12 | 2014-12-16 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for driving display device |
US9035852B2 (en) | 2011-05-13 | 2015-05-19 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for driving light-emitting device |
US8878589B2 (en) | 2011-06-30 | 2014-11-04 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and driving method thereof |
US9508759B2 (en) | 2011-06-30 | 2016-11-29 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and driving method thereof |
USRE48576E1 (en) | 2011-06-30 | 2021-06-01 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and driving method thereof |
US10629122B2 (en) | 2011-07-22 | 2020-04-21 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device |
US11741895B2 (en) | 2011-07-22 | 2023-08-29 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device |
US11081050B2 (en) | 2011-07-22 | 2021-08-03 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device |
US10008149B2 (en) | 2011-07-22 | 2018-06-26 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device including pixels suppressing variation in luminance |
US9136287B2 (en) | 2011-08-05 | 2015-09-15 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US8710505B2 (en) | 2011-08-05 | 2014-04-29 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US8836689B2 (en) * | 2011-08-05 | 2014-09-16 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device |
US20130033475A1 (en) * | 2011-08-05 | 2013-02-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display Device |
US8901828B2 (en) | 2011-09-09 | 2014-12-02 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US9082670B2 (en) | 2011-09-09 | 2015-07-14 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US10056413B2 (en) | 2011-10-18 | 2018-08-21 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US9280931B2 (en) | 2011-10-18 | 2016-03-08 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US10615189B2 (en) | 2011-10-18 | 2020-04-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US11587957B2 (en) | 2011-10-18 | 2023-02-21 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US10043794B2 (en) | 2012-03-22 | 2018-08-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and electronic device |
US20130321249A1 (en) * | 2012-06-01 | 2013-12-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor Device and Method for Driving Semiconductor Device |
US9257071B2 (en) * | 2012-06-01 | 2016-02-09 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and method for driving semiconductor device |
US20130321248A1 (en) * | 2012-06-01 | 2013-12-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor Device and Method for Driving Semiconductor Device |
US9721942B2 (en) | 2012-06-01 | 2017-08-01 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and method for driving semiconductor device |
US9013457B2 (en) * | 2012-06-01 | 2015-04-21 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and method for driving semiconductor device |
US20150214249A1 (en) * | 2013-03-28 | 2015-07-30 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Array Substrate, Display Device and Manufacturing Method |
US20170317107A1 (en) * | 2013-11-05 | 2017-11-02 | Ananda H. Kumar | Novel silicon-based backplane structures and methods for display applications |
US12068335B2 (en) * | 2013-12-12 | 2024-08-20 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device |
US9536904B2 (en) | 2013-12-27 | 2017-01-03 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device |
US9786690B2 (en) | 2013-12-27 | 2017-10-10 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device |
US9230996B2 (en) | 2013-12-27 | 2016-01-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device |
US10483293B2 (en) | 2014-02-27 | 2019-11-19 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Active matrix display device, and module and electronic appliance including the same |
US11605655B2 (en) | 2014-02-27 | 2023-03-14 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, and module and electronic appliance including the same |
US11916088B2 (en) | 2014-02-27 | 2024-02-27 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device, and module and electronic appliance including the same |
CN103927981A (en) * | 2014-03-24 | 2014-07-16 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Pixel circuit and driving method and display device thereof |
US10482818B2 (en) * | 2017-02-01 | 2019-11-19 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Pixel controlled via emission control signals during sub-periods and display device including the same |
US20180218678A1 (en) * | 2017-02-01 | 2018-08-02 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Pixel and display device including the same |
US11637152B2 (en) * | 2019-06-11 | 2023-04-25 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Array substrate and method for manufacturing the same, and display device having photosensitive element, light emitting device and sensing transistor |
US11094241B2 (en) * | 2019-07-05 | 2021-08-17 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Display driver, electro-optical device, electronic apparatus, and mobile body |
US11854483B2 (en) | 2019-10-31 | 2023-12-26 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Display device, pixel circuit, and method for driving same |
CN111402814B (en) * | 2020-03-26 | 2022-04-12 | 昆山国显光电有限公司 | Display panel, driving method of display panel and display device |
CN111402814A (en) * | 2020-03-26 | 2020-07-10 | 昆山国显光电有限公司 | Display panel, driving method of display panel and display device |
Also Published As
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US12063829B2 (en) | Display device | |
US9276037B2 (en) | Semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device | |
JP5025242B2 (en) | Semiconductor device, display device, module, and electronic device | |
US20150255488A1 (en) | Semiconductor Device, Display Device, And Electronic Device | |
JP5448257B2 (en) | Semiconductor device, display device, display module, and electronic apparatus |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: SEMICONDUCTOR ENERGY LABORATORY CO., LTD., JAPAN Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:KIMURA, HAJIME;REEL/FRAME:018554/0057 Effective date: 20061102 |
|
STCF | Information on status: patent grant |
Free format text: PATENTED CASE |
|
FEPP | Fee payment procedure |
Free format text: PAYOR NUMBER ASSIGNED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: ASPN); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY |
|
FPAY | Fee payment |
Year of fee payment: 4 |
|
MAFP | Maintenance fee payment |
Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 8TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1552); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY Year of fee payment: 8 |
|
FEPP | Fee payment procedure |
Free format text: MAINTENANCE FEE REMINDER MAILED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: REM.); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY |